Chrysler - 300 - Owners Manual - 2015 - 2015

2015 OWNER’S MANUAL 300 VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS 䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6 䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1 4 INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techniLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision cians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction. workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL essentials that are traditional to our vehicles. Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- contains the information you desire. tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual tions and recommendations in this manual will help contains a complete listing of all subjects. assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Consult the following table for a description of the NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- this Owner’s Manual: ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 5 1 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible VIN Location from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartDisclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment. vehicle registration, and the title. INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. 1 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS 䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21 䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .21 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .24 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 ▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 ▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 ▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .46 ▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 ▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .60 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .96 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 ▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System) has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system illuminate when in position. The three positions are: OFF, consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN). During start, ON/RUN will illuminate. Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may feature. Refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information. method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Key Fob against the Engine START/STOP button and This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with push to operate the ignition. the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment. A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob. The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking. Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System) 1 — OFF 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 3 — ON/RUN 2 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand. Emergency Key Removal NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up. Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster. NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. WARNING! • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) 2 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. CAUTION! The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank with an invalid Key Fob. After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the system. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start SENTRY KEY® the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- engine being shut off after two seconds. ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition in the OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer. CAUTION! • Do not make modifications or alterations to the immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to the immobilization system may result in a loss of security protection. • The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. Replacement Keys NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. CAUTION! • Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position. 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed. General Information Customer Key Programming user’s authority to operate the equipment. The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved authorized dealer. by the party responsible for compliance could void the Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED To Arm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm: for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ 1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is placed in the “OFF” START/STOP button for unauthorized operation. While position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for And Operating⬙ for further information). door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something • Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF. triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, vehicle: and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster • Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch will flash. with the driver and/or passenger door open. Rearming Of The System • Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle further information). Security Alarm will rearm itself. 2 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry NOTE: (RKE) transmitter. • The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle 3. If any doors are open, close them. Security Alarm. To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. the following methods: The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your • Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the Entry (RKE) transmitter. system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Secuequipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things rity Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle information. Security Alarm. • Place the vehicle ignition system in the OFF position. • Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle). THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery NOTE: becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will re• The front courtesy overhead console and door courmain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm “Dome ON” position (extreme top position). the Vehicle Security Alarm. • The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the Security System Manual Override dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the (extreme bottom position). doors using the manual door lock plunger. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from disRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held doors or open any door. Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. outside mirrors (if equipped). The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position. 2 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above To Unlock The Doors disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit- Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE ter buttons for all RKE transmitters. transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks Key Fob With RKE Transmitter This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the Sound Horn With Lock current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “UnderThis feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be Headlight Illumination On Approach turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. Instrument Panel” for further information. Flash Lights With Lock The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles To Unlatch The Trunk equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk. Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to To Lock The Doors “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one by the system. second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, Programming Additional Transmitters and the interior lights will turn on. Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless performed at an authorized dealer. you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a Transmitter Battery Replacement second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 (24 km/h) or greater. battery. NOTE: NOTE: • The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will remain on. • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board. Using The Panic Alarm THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves with your thumb and then pull the key out with your of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage other hand. the seal during removal. Emergency Key Removal Separating The RKE Transmitter Case 2 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions: 4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two 1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years. halves together. 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and radios. RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: General Information • This device may not cause harmful interference. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry engine will remote start: (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve• Vehicle in PARK niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of • Doors closed approximately 300 ft (91 m). • Hood closed NOTE: • Trunk closed • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic • Hazard switch off transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed) • Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range. • Battery at an acceptable charge level • RKE panic button not pushed 2 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • System not disabled from previous remote start event Remote Start Abort Message • Vehicle security alarm not active • Ignition in OFF position The following messages will display in the instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely: WARNING! • Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled. • Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar • Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset The instrument cluster message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before Push and release the REMOTE START button on you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking lights will To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The flash and the horn will chirp twice (if pro- Vehicle grammed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle. allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle. NOTE: NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system • If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request. • The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode. To Enter Remote Start Mode • For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP button. NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in the DID until you push the START button. DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. Door Lock Knob THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. WARNING! • For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 2 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the A power door lock switch is on each front door trim Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. Power Door Locks If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob. Power Door Lock Switch THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped 3. The driver door is opened. The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see your authorized dealer for service. 4. The doors were not previously unlocked. Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with in accordance with local laws. power door locks if: Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding abled. in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with 2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to Child-Protection Door Lock system. 0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission is placed in PARK. Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit 2 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock System 1. Open the rear door. 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door. Child-Protection Door Lock Function WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked). THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower reraise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll sponse time. down the window, and open the door using the outside door handle. • If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the security alarm. vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . This feature allows you To Unlock From The Driver’s Side to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons. (1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to door is unlocked. “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. NOTE: 2 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked. NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). Grab The Door Handle To Unlock NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry. NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid search in any passive entry vehicle. Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is 1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock transmitter while a door is ajar. the doors when any of the following conditions are true: 2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door • The doors are locked manually using the door lock handle while a door is ajar. knobs. 3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while • There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside the door is ajar. the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are Entry door handle. shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a • Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car and it does door panel switch and then close the doors. not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer. 2 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless (1.0 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the right side another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitof CHMSL (Center High Mounted Stop Light), which is ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the located on the deck lid. deck lid. To Enter The Trunk To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors. Trunk Passive Entry Button THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s). 2 Push The Door Handle Button To Lock Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: WINDOWS • After pushing the door handle button, you must wait Power Windows two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, The window controls on the driver’s door control all the using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to door windows. allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking. • The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead. The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel. Power Window Switches THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position. WARNING! (Continued) ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in AUTO-Down Feature “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inThe driver door power window switch and some model formation. passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Push the window switch to the second WARNING! detent, release, and the window will go down automatiNever leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do cally. not let children play with power windows. Do not To open the window part way, push the window switch leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a to the first detent and release it when you want the location accessible to children, and do not leave the window to stop. (Continued) 2 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To stop the window from going all the way down during • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autothe AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If first detent and hold to close the window manually. Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically. To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly. WARNING! There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing. To close the window part way, lift the window switch to Reset Auto-Up the first detent and release it when you want the window Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window to stop. may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up: NOTE: 1. Make sure the door is fully closed. • If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back 2. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an down. Remove the obstacle and use the window additional two seconds after the window is closed. switch again to close the window. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open. 2 Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors and the rear sunscreen (if equipped). To disable the window controls and the rear sunscreen, push and release the window lockout button (setting it in the DOWN position). To enable the window controls and the rear sunscreen, push and release the window lockout button again (setting it in the UP position). Window Lockout Switch 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting. TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE Trunk Release Button The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pushing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or by using the external release switch located on the underside of the decklid overhang. The release feature will function only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition. With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed. The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pushing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. symbol will display until the trunk is closed. NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Trunk Emergency Release Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature. lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can TRUNK SAFETY WARNING be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism. WARNING! Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke. Trunk Emergency Internal Release 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems: 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. • Seat Belt Systems 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, • Child Restraints move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”) Important Safety Precautions Please pay close attention to the information in this 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should be section. It tells you how to use your restraint system secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do possible. not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be them or under their arm. modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided 5. You should read the instructions provided with your under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙ child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. WARNING! 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate. 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door and you could be injured. • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. 2 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both and could cause a collision that includes you. This can outboard front seat belts are buckled. happen far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled. inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts be belted at all times. are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occuEnhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat (BeltAlert) belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver 5 MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and and outboard front passenger (if equipped with out- visual notification. board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat Seat Belt Systems THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho- vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert. NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled. 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. (Continued) (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. • A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. (Continued) (Continued) 2 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the front seat. Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 2 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortThe folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will the latch plate. withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, shoulder belt. and move it up or down to the position that serves you best. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position. Seat Belt Extender Adjustable Anchorage As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position. If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed. 2 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision. Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts worn snugly and positioned properly. throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor equipped with Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section of this manual. The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position. 2 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the passenger seating position is equipped with an seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the Children 12 years old and under should always be seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat. around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratchWARNING! eting sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearplate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ facing child restraint. In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto- • Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle matically pre locked. The seat belt will still retract to with a rear seat. remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted. 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. WARNING! • The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child. 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) • Front and Side Impact Sensors Air Bag System Components • Seat Belt Pretenioners Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Seat Belt Buckle Switch system components: • Seat Track Position Sensors • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Advanced Front Air Bags • Air Bag Warning Light This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the • Steering Wheel and Column driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air • Instrument Panel Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The • Knee Impact Bolsters passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The • Advanced Front Air Bags words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on • Supplemental Side Air Bags the air bag covers. • Supplemental Knee Air Bags THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING! Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 3 — Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage Advanced Front Air Bags. driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as WARNING! determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact • No objects should be placed over or near the air sensors or other system components. bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel, Advanced Front Air Bag Features The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate. • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING! (Continued) • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. Advanced Front Air Bag Operation Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. Knee Impact Bolsters Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced Front Air Bags. The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the Supplemental Side Air Bags driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags. Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags: 1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): WARNING! Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. bolsters in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. WARNING! Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING! • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions. • Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. 2 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child. WARNING! (Continued) • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. WARNING! • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. • Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Side Impacts Rollover Events In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event. 2 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment. NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system. If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deand/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fricbags will not be in place to protect you. tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING! Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well. NOTE: Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions: • Cut off fuel to the engine. • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition is placed in the “OFF” position. • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as but they will open during air bag deployment. the battery has power or until the ignition is placed in • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an the “OFF” position. authorized dealer immediately. • Unlock the doors automatically. 2 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. functions after an event, the ignition must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds Air Bag Warning Light for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag The air bags must be ready to inflate for your Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malprotection in a collision. The Occupant Re- function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A circuits and interconnecting wiring associated single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on with air bag system electrical components. again after initial startup. System Reset Procedure The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. WARNING! Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or Redundant Air Bag Warning Light remains on while driving. If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine detected, which could affect the Supplemental related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the inthe air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec- strument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single system immediately. chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. 2 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of this manual. Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 These data can help provide a better understanding of This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to are recorded. However, other parties, such as law envehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle personally identifying data routinely acquired during a is designed to record such data as: crash investigation. Event Data Recorder (EDR) • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, were buckled/fastened; such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelera- ment, can read the information if they have access to the tor and/or brake pedal; and, vehicle or the EDR. • How fast the vehicle was traveling. 2 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Child Restraints WARNING! (Continued) Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosThere are different sizes and types of restraints for ecuted for ignoring it. children from newborn size to the child almost large Children 12 years or younger should ride properly enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructhe rear seats rather than in the front. tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint. WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so (Continued) Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 NOTE: • For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: 2 • www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Infants and Toddlers Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Small Children Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should 2 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forwardfacing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone: 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat? 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way back? 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm? 4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach? 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. WARNING! Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly. 2 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Only + Top Tether Anchor X X X X X X THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) Restraint System Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. 2 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle • • Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint? 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint? Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage? No No Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint. Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. 2 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. Center position only may be removed. Locating LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. LATCH Anchorages THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 Locating Tether Anchorages There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window. They are found under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Center Seat LATCH If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position. Tether Strap Anchorages 2 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions. 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head Always follow the directions of the child restraint restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to all child restraint systems will be installed as described move it to its rear-most position to make room for the here. child seat. You may also move the front seat forward To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint to allow more room for the child seat. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto- 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatbelt, following the instructions below. See the section ing position. “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. 2 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle 2 • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Weight limit of the Child Restraint Can the head restraints be removed? Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint? Yes No Yes Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. Center Only may be removed. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract Place the child seat in the center of the seating back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will position. For some second row seats, you may need to hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a the Automatic Locking mode. better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat. bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. seat. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether “click.” strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anagainst the child seat. chor. Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) 1. 2. 3. 4. 2 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. WARNING! (Continued) (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle. Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage WARNING! Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (Continued) 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint. 2 3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. Tether Strap Mounting 1 — Cover 3 — Attaching Strap A — Tether Strap Hook B — Tether Anchor 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to Transporting Pets the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An 5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. restraint manufacturer’s instructions. WARNING! • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.” CAUTION! Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem. SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. 2 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust Gas WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. (Continued) • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be not lit during starting, see your authorized replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while system. driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a Defroster collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authobelt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. Seat Belts 2 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Floor Mat Safety Information WARNING! (Continued) Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. WARNING! Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. • Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners. • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. (Continued) • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. • If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Door Latches Tires Fluid Leaks Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately. Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Check for positive closing, latching, and locking. 2 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .110 ▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 ▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 ▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .119 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .119 ▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 ▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 ▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .116 ▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 ▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .117 ▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 3 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .147 ▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 ▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .134 ▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .149 ▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .137 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 ▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .143 ▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .144 ▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 ▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 ▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 ▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 ▫ Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 ▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL). . . . . . . . . . . .152 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 ▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .155 ▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 ▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .157 ▫ Rain Sensing Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .164 䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .168 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .160 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 ▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 3 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 ▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .185 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 ▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 ▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 ▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .190 ▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .177 ▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .178 ▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 ▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 ▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .191 ▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .194 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 ▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 ▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .203 ▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 ▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With ▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 ▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 ▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .206 ▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .224 ▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 ▫ Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .225 ▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .226 䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 ▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .226 ▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .208 䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 ▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped ▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 ▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 ▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 . . .231 . . .231 . . .232 . . .233 ▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .233 ▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 ▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .234 3 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .244 ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .237 ▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .245 ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .238 ▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .245 ▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .245 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 䡵 COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .244 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .244 ▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .247 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 ▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 ▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 ▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 ▫ Trunk Mat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 ▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 ▫ Grocery Bag Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 ▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 ▫ Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 ▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . .257 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 ▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 ▫ Power Sunshade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .261 䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .262 3 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your InstruA single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is ment Panel” for further information. a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. MIRRORS This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. NOTE: • The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing. Automatic Dimming Mirror If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a 9-1-1 button. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 NOTE: The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only vehicle issues. operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is 9-1-1 Call active. Refer to your “Uconnect® System supplement 1. Press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror. manual” for further information. ASSIST Call The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers: NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call connection, press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off. • Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just press the Assist button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location. 2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance. buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a • Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made. for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via Mobile features. 3 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection. operator: 5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate • Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call. emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates. • The vehicle brand. • The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle. 4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed. NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in WARNING! • If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location. • The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 WARNING! (Continued) signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE. • Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you. 9-1-1 Call System Limitations Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1 Call system capabilities. 9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls. If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle: • The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red. • The Phone Screen will display the following message “Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer.” • An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer.” 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately. • The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the ORC system immediately. Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors beyond Chrysler Group LLC’s control may prevent or stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors: • Delayed accessories mode is active. • The ignition is in the OFF position. • The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact. • The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are damaged during a crash. • The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash. • Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed. • Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility. • Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 • Wireless network congestion. • Weather. • Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels. CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle Outside Mirrors from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight properly. overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror. General Information NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) lane next to your vehicle. This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 3 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts. NOTE: This feature is also available on the passenger’s side when equipped with turn signal and approach lighting. Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach Lighting — If Equipped Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to located in the upper outer corner of each mirror. resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash forward, full rearward and normal. with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of the doors. Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30 mirrors will then return to the original position when the seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirignition is placed into the RUN position. rors in Reverse position. NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned gear selector is moved out of the PARK position. on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 3 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The power mirror controls consist of mirror select butThe power mirror controls are located on the driver’s tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select door trim panel. the mirror that you want to adjust. Power Mirrors NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted. Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Power Mirror Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position. An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light. NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled. If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will automatically unfold. Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Illuminated Vanity Mirror 3 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun Visor To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window, grab the sun visor and pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward. Slide-On-Rod Feature UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK. BSM Warning Light 3 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. NOTE: • The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones. • The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear. The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.). Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information. 3 The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries. Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle. Side Monitoring 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed of side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative less than 15 m.p.h. (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light speed of less than 30 m.p.h. (48 km/h). will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 m.p.h. (24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate. Rear Monitoring Overtaking/Approaching UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes. on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service. Stationary Objects Overtaking/Passing 3 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Rear Cross Path Opposing Traffic WARNING! The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM (Continued) The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver. When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume. WARNING! RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations. RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. 3 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Modes Of Operation Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime Blind Spot Alert Lights Only will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deWhen operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM tected object are present on the same side at the same system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In view mirror based on a detected object. However, when addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the be reduced. system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible NOTE: alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced. • Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio volume is reduced. Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/ Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request the appropriate visual alert only. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime. Blind Spot Alert Off General Information This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: When the BSM system is turned off there will be no 1. The device may not cause harmful interference. visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP 2. The device must accept any interference received, systems. including interference that may cause undesired opNOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating eration of the device. mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void used. authorization to use this equipment. 3 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SEATS Power Seats Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the On models equipped with power seats, the switch is vehicle. located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver’s seat up or down, forward or rearward or to recline the seatback. WARNING! • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 WARNING! Power Seat Switches 1 — Seat Control 2 — Seatback Control — (If Equipped) • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. 3 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path. Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Reclining The Seatback WARNING! (Continued) The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. (Continued) • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path. 3 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Lumbar — If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support. Power Lumbar Switch Heated Seats — If Equipped On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated Front Heated Seats using the Uconnect® System. The front heated seats control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen. WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF. • Press the heated seat button setting ON. once to turn the HI • Press the heated seat button the LO setting ON. a second time to turn • Press the heated seat button the heating elements OFF. a third time to turn If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display 3 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The Rear Heated Seats LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap- On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped proximately 45 minutes. with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console. There NOTE: that allow the rear are two heated seat switches • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within passengers to operate the seats independently. two to five minutes. You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The • The engine must be running for the heated seats to indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in operate. use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start once to select HI-level On models that are equipped with remote start, the • Press the heated seat button heating. heated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start. • Press the heated seat button a second time to select LO-level heating. This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand- • Press the heated seat button a third time to turn ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. the heating elements OFF. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 NOTE: Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within Located in the seat cushion and seat back are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and two to five minutes. move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to • The engine must be running for the heated seats to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher operate. ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will HI and LO. provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes The front ventilated seats control buttons are located of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls system will automatically switch to LO-level after ap- screen. proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that once to choose HI. time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two • Press the ventilated seat button to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will • Press the ventilated seat button a second time to turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes. choose LO. • Press the ventilated seat button turn the ventilated seat OFF. a third time to 3 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start. WARNING! The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats Head Restraints The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. head and the RHR. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then push the release button and the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head Adjustment Button restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then 1 — Release Button adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height. 2 — Adjustment Button 3 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment. • ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. • Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death. Rear Head Restraints The center head restraint has two adjustable positions, up or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position. When there are no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on the loops located on the upper seatback. NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use. Adjustment Button NOTE: • The head restraint should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If the center rear head restraints requires removal, see your authorized dealer. • The outboard head restraints are not adjustable. Rear Seatback Loop 3 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward. WARNING! • Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. • The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system. Folded Rear Seatback When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S) This feature allows the driver to store up to two different button, which is used to activate the memory save memory profiles for easy recall through a memory function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to switch. Each memory profile contains desired position recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles. settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed. DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: • Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions. • Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the memory function. Use either the memory recall switch or the RKE transmitter (if linked to the memory feature) to recall memory positions 1 or 2. Memory Seat Switch 3 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Programming The Memory Feature To create a new memory profile, perform the following: Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the [if equipped], and radio station presets). Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” 3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. switch. 1. Place the ignition into the RUN position. 4. Within five seconds, press and release either of the To program your RKE transmitters, perform the followmemory buttons (1) or (2). The Driver Information ing: Display (DID) will display which memory position 1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the Off position. has been set. 2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system NOTE: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle will recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a the system to complete the memory recall before memory profile. continuing to Step 3. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, Memory Position Recall refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory section for instructions on how to set a memory profile. positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not 3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release in PARK, a message will display in the DID (if equipped). the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press To recall the memory settings for driver one, press and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory MEMORY button number (1) on the driver’s door or the Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to cluster. memory position 1. 4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE To recall the memory setting for driver two, press transmitter within 10 seconds. MEMORY button number (2) on the driver’s door or the NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button, and memory position 2. within 10 seconds, followed by pressing the UNLOCK A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY button on the RKE transmitter. buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected. 3 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit vehicle. or Easy Entry. The distance the driver seat moves depends on where Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the Entry and Easy Exit position. vehicles ignition to the OFF position. NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when • When you cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater the programmable features in the Uconnect® system. than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable stop. The seat will return to its previously set position Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for when you cycle the vehicles ignition to the ACC or further information. RUN position. Easy Entry/Exit Seat UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood. 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood. 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel. 3 Hood Safety Latch Hood Release Lever Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in the open position. 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Automatic Headlights — If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position. Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation. NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode. 3 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on begins when the headlight switch is turned off. after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by delay. this feature. If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turn off in the normal manner. turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to NOTE: “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for • The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this further information. feature. Headlight Time Delay • The headlight delay time is programmable using the This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further vehicle in an unlit area. information. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system pro- proper performance. See your local authorized dealer. vides increased forward lighting at night by automating To Activate high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position. specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. 2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode. NOTE: Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If Equipped • The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to at or above 15 mph (24 km/h). “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- To Deactivate ment Panel” for further information. 1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to operation of low beams). remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera 2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system. lens will cause the system to function improperly. 3 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge Headlights — If Equipped Daytime Running Lights (DRL) The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when the This system automatically swivels the headlight beam engine starts, headlights are off, and the parking brake is pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in off. The headlight switch must be used for normal the direction the vehicle is steering. nighttime driving. NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can • Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on, be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer the headlights will initialize by performing a brief to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrusequence of rotations. ment Panel” for further information. • The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when Lights-On Reminder the vehicle is moving forward. If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Setthe driver when the driver’s door is opened. tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. NOTE: UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the Front Fog Lights — If Equipped headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either The front fog light switch is built into the headlight press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the switch. headlight switch. Fog Lights — If Equipped NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights. Fog Light Switch 3 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Multifunction Lever Turn Signals The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show multifunction lever is located on the left side of the proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. steering column. NOTE: • If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. • A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. Multifunction Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Lane Change Assist Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overthe detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash head console. three times then automatically turn off. High/Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. Flash-To-Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released. Front Map/Reading Lights 3 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is pressed. Courtesy Lights The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time. Courtesy Lights Front Map/Reading Light Switches UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Ambient Light — If Equipped Interior Lights The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The interior lights come on when a door is opened. feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibilTo protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off ity of the floor and center console area. automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk light. To restore interior light operation, either place the ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch. Ambient Light 3 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if located on the left side of the instrument panel. equipped). Dimmer Controls Dimmer Controls Instrument Panel Dimmer UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Ambient Light Control Dome Light Position Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior lights and ambient light located in the overhead console. lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position. Interior Light Defeat (OFF) Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom “OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open. Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature) Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID), and radio when the position lights or headlights are on. Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer 3 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Intermittent Wiper System The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation. Windshield Wiper/Washer Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 CAUTION! • Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off. • In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted. • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. Mist Feature Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever. NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid. Windshield Washers To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired. 3 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by and then turn off. this feature. WARNING! Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use. NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using This feature senses moisture on the windshield and the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infeature is especially useful for road splash or over spray formation. from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate NOTE: the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the to activate this feature. wiper speed is in the low or high position. The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least • The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windsensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. shield. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions. Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper • Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more may reduce rain sensor performance. sensitivity. The rain sense wipers will automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of moisture that is sensed on the windshield. Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system. Rain Sensing Wipers 3 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the • Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start following conditions: mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the previously) exist. wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN the outside temperature rises above freezing. This feature allows you to tilt the steering column • Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is position, the automatic transmission gear selector is in located below the steering wheel at the end of the the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less steering column. than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged. WARNING! Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. 3 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column switch is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column. Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Switch To tilt the steering column, move the switch up or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the switch toward you or push the switch away from you as desired. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm. The heated steering wheel control button is located within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls screen. • Press the heated steering wheel button turn the heating element ON. once to • Press the heated steering wheel button time to turn the heating element OFF. a second NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate. 3 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start WARNING! (Continued) On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start through the Uconnect® system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat. ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. (Continued) The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel. The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat cushion side shield. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward (toward the driver). • The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF. • The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Driver Information Display (DID) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”). Adjustable Pedals Switch NOTE: Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward • Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full (toward the front of the vehicle). pedal travel. • Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the best possible seat/pedal position. 3 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you WARNING! can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving. to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed You could lose control and have an accident. Always positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Under- adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked. standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED CAUTION! Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal’s path. When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. To Activate Electronic Speed Control Buttons 1 — ON/OFF 2 — SET+/ACCEL 3 — RESUME 4 — SET-/DECEL 5 — CANCEL Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is off. The system should be turned off when not in use. 3 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it. To Set A Desired Speed To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from memory. To Resume Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) has reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or button and release. Resume can be used at any speed SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the above 20 mph (32 km/h). vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 To Vary The Speed Setting Metric Speed (km/h) • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inbutton results in an increase of 1 km/h. crease speed by pushing the SET + button. The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underthe new set speed will be established. standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen To Decrease Speed speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can deU.S. Speed (mph) crease speed by pushing the SET - button. To Increase Speed • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph The drivers preferred units can be selected through the increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information. button results in an increase of 1 mph. • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. 3 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen To Accelerate For Passing speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. U.S. Speed (mph) • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. vehicle set speed. • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains continue to decrease until the button is released, then speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on the new set speed will be established. moderate hills is normal. Metric Speed (km/h) On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the Control. button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 WARNING! Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you. NOTE: • If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed. • If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the original set speed) automatically to maintain a Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving preset following distance, while matching the speed of convenience provided by cruise control while traveling the vehicle ahead. on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. Electronic Speed Control function performs differently. Please refer to the proper section within this chapter. 3 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The Cruise Control system has two control modes: • Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles. • Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section. NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected. You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected. WARNING! • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. • The ACC system: • Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions. • Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings. • Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start moving within two seconds the ACC system will display a message that the system will release the brakes and that the brakes must be applied manually. An audible chime will sound when the brakes are released. You should switch off the ACC system: • When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones). • When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes. • When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. • When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed. (Continued) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC system. 3 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System. Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph (32 km/h). Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF — SET+/ACCEL — RESUME — SET-/DECEL — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE — CANCEL When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC Ready.” When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following To Activate/Deactivate conditions: Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays • When you apply the brakes. “ACC Ready.” • When the parking brake is set. • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL. • When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range. • When the brakes are overheated. • When the driver door is open. • When the driver seat belt is unbuckled. Adaptive Cruise Control Ready 3 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the DID will display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” WARNING! Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it. To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID will display the set speed. Adaptive Cruise Control Off If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle • The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the Drive position. in front of your vehicle in close proximity. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sysnot, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set tem (ESC/TCS) activates. speed. If this occurs: • The vehicle parking brake is applied. • The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in • Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds. the DID. • Driver door is opened at low speeds. • The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle • The driver switches ESC to full-off mode. speed will only be determined by the position of the NOTE: accelerator pedal. • If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two To Cancel seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake The following conditions cancel the system: force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill. • The brake pedal is applied. • The CANCEL button is pressed. • An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs. • ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity. 3 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Turn Off NOTE: The system will turn off and erase the set speed in • If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two memory if: seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply • The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill. ON/OFF button is pressed. • ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle • The ignition is turned off. in-front of your vehicle in close proximity. • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is pressed. WARNING! To Resume If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume) button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The DID will display the last set speed. The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 To Vary The Speed Setting Metric Speed (km/h) • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by button results in an increase of 1 km/h. pressing the SET + button. The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Underbutton is released. The increase in set speed is reflected standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. in the DID. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): To Decrease Speed To Increase Speed U.S. Speed (mph) While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pressing the SET - button. • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Underbutton results in an increase of 1 mph. standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID. 3 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): button is released. The decrease in set speed is reU.S. Speed (mph) flected in the DID. • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph NOTE: decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the • When you override and push the SET + button or button results in a decrease of 1 mph. SET - buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will speed of the vehicle. continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the DID. engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system Metric Speed (km/h) will automatically slow the vehicle. • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 • The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two distance setting displays in the DID. seconds the driver will either have to press the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed. • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated). Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest) 3 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter). If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed. The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until: Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short) • The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Setspeed. ting — Increase button and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor. (longer). 3 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • The distance setting is changed. • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on ACC Activation). The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary. NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes. A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert Brake Alert “BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the DID is a warning for while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean capacity. that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 If the target vehicle does not start moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC with When driving with ACC engaged and following a Target Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleramessage will display on the DID and produce a warning tion to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment. acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left or right turn signal. The Overtake Aid will only provide While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a additional acceleration if the vehicle moves with the standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver corresponding turn signal and until the current set speed door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel is reached. The ACC system will automatically detect and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display traffic direction in the respective lane when the right or on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment. left turn signal is utilized. Overtake Aid ACC Operation At Stop If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the need for any driver action. WARNING! When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. 3 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the DID: The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The ACC SET information it displays depends on ACC system status. When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ instrument cluster. OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC the following displays in the DID: activity occurs, which may include any of the following: Adaptive Cruise Control Off • System Cancel When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap• Driver Override tive Cruise Control Off.” • System Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Proximity Warning not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise • ACC Unavailable Warning Control Ready.” • The DID will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the “Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when Warning the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” this warning may temporarily occur. warning will display and also a chime will indicate when NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar conditions temporarily limit system performance. Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as Control is still available. For additional information refer in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, section. dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/ FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of system will deactivate. an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” vehicle behind the lower grille. message can sometimes be displayed while driving in Display Warnings And Maintenance 3 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- When the condition that deactivated the system is no tant to note the following maintenance items: longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the simply reactivating it. sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens. NOTE: • Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so • If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than require a sensor realignment. once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at • If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due your authorized dealer. to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service. • Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, market grille or modifying the grille is not recomincluding transparent material or aftermarket grilles. mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or ACC/FCW operation. malfunction. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front temporarily occur. Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per- If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil- examine the windshield and the camera located on the ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may system may also become temporarily blinded due to require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and When the condition that created limited functionality is fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the DID will no longer present, the system will return to full functiondisplay “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front ality. Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance. NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while other obstruction, have the windshield and forward driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer. system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. “Clean Front Windshield” Warning 3 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Service ACC/FCW Warning If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer. Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene. Towing A Trailer Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC. Offset Driving Condition Example UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 Turns And Bends When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality. 3 NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. Turn Or Bend Example 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Using ACC On Hills Lane Changing When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. ACC Hill Example UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. Lane Changing Example Narrow Vehicle Example 3 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Stationary Objects And Vehicles General Information ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. The device may not cause harmful interference. 2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h). WARNING! In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected. To change between the different control modes, press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button To Set A Desired Speed which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONSpeed Control ON. When the vehicle has TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changreached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed ConSET (-) button and release. Release the acceltrol mode. erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. 3 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON- The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic U.S. Speed (mph) speed control is SET. • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph To Vary The Speed Setting increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the To Increase Speed button results in an increase of 1 mph. When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will trol is set, you can increase speed by pressing the SET + continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button. button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID display. The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- Metric Speed (km/h) standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is rebutton is released. The increase in set speed is reflected flected in the DID display. in the DID display. To Decrease Speed Metric Speed (km/h) When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the you can decrease speed by pressing the SET - button. button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reThe speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed flected in the DID display. of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: U.S. Speed (mph) • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. 3 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Cancel To Resume Speed The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the and release. Resume can be used at any speed above memory: 20 mph (32 km/h). • The brake pedal is applied. To Turn Off • The CANCEL button is pressed. The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if: • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control tem (ESC/TCS) activates. ON/OFF button is pressed. • The vehicle parking brake is applied. • The ignition is turned off. • The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is heated). pressed. • The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the Drive position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation Operation The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision. NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required. If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system may provide the maximum or partial braking to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes. 3 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph (2 km/h). • The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality. FCW Message • It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle. When the system determines a collision with the vehicle • The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If in front of you is no longer probable, the warning the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should message will be deactivated. be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 WARNING! Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death. Turning FCW ON Or OFF To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns off). Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you. Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the system from providing limited autonomous braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision. NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, vehicle in front of you. it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted. The forward collision button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect® display. To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on). 3 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Changing FCW And Active Braking Status NOTE: The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are • The system will retain the last setting selected by the programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to driver after ignition shut down. “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as ment Panel” for further information. overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the path of the car, stationary objects that are far away, Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in higher rate of speed. front of you when you are farther away and it applies limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to • FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable screens. avoid a possible collision. Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 FCW Limited Warning LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED If the DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer. LaneSense Operation The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries. When both lane markings are detected and the driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warnService FCW Warning ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to If the system turns off, and the DID displays: prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning • Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required through the Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have The driver may manually override the haptic warning by the system checked by an authorized dealer. applying torque into the steering wheel at any time. 3 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the DID to prompt the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided. NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel. Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”. The LaneSense button is located on the center stack below the Uconnect® display. LaneSense Button Location To turn the LaneSense system ON, press the LaneSense button to turn the system ON (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is shown in the DID. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 To turn the LaneSense system OFF, press the LaneSense button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on). NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. LaneSense Warning Message The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the Driver Information Display (DID). 7.0 Driver Information Display (DID) Screen — If Equipped System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator) When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense indicator is solid white. • When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional lane departure occurs. 3 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white to flashing yellow. Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator) NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected. Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected • When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 • For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. 3 Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator) • When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator) 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. • For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator) NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 Changing LaneSense Status NOTE: The LaneSense system settings can be configured through • When enabled the system operates above 37 mph the Uconnect® system screen. (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings: • Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings. 1. Press the “Controls” button on touchscreen located on • The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel the bottom of the Uconnect® display. whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes, traction control system, electronic stability control, 2. Press the “Settings” button. forward collision warning, etc.) 3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button. PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED configure the intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the person- The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear alization settings. and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations. 3 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/ disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect changed to the ON/RUN position. obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in ParkSense® can be active only when the gear selector is (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of these gear selector positions, the system will remain of the obstacle. active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will ParkSense® Warning Display become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® SysParkSense® Sensors tem. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/ Your Instrument Panel” for further information. bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnobstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 59 in ings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/ (150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected direction, depending on the location, type and orienta- obstacle. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for tion of the obstacle. further information. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the Rear Park Assist left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the DID will display the sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, park assist ready system status. the display will show the single arc moving closer to the The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous. a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle. ParkSense® Display If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous. Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc 3 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Slow Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 3 Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle: Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 Rear Distance (in/cm) Arcs — Left Arcs — Center Arcs — Right Audible Alert Chime WARNING ALERTS 59-47 in 47-39 in (150(120120 cm) 100 cm) Greater than 79 in (200 cm) None 79-59 in (200150 cm) 39-25 in (100-65 cm) None None None None None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid None None None None 3rd Flashing None None Single 1/2Second Tone (for rear center only) Slow (for rear center only) Slow (for rear center only) Fast (for rear center only) 25-12 in (65-30 cm) 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing Fast Less than 12 in (30 cm) 1st Flashing 1st Flashing 1st Flashing Continuous 3 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Distance (in/cm) Radio Volume Reduced Greater than 79 in (200 cm) No 79-59 in (200150 cm) Yes WARNING ALERTS 59-47 in 47-39 in (150(120120 cm) 100 cm) Yes Yes 39-25 in (100-65 cm) 25-12 in (65-30 cm) Less than 12 in (30 cm) Yes Yes Yes If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the display will show a single arc in the center front region. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display Front Park Assist will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense® Warning fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected. flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing when the 1st flashing arc appears. a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle. NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous. 3 Fast Tone/Flashing Arc No Tone/Solid Arc 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle: Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 Front Distance (in/cm) Arcs — Left Arcs — Center Arcs — Right Audible Alert Chime Radio Volume Reduced Greater than 47 in (120 cm) None None None None No WARNING ALERTS 47-39 in 39-25 in (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) None None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing None None None None No No 25-12 in (65-30 cm) 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing Fast Less than 12 in (30 cm) 1st Flashing 1st Flashing 1st Flashing Continuous Yes Yes NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, Front Park Assist Audible Alerts if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied. 3 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adjustable Chime Volume Settings Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un- the Uconnect® display. derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If the Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume settings will not be accessible from the DID. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles. ParkSense® Switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for further information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the DID will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON. Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to Reverse and the system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver Information Display (DID) will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These 3 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE arc alerts will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for further information. Cleaning The ParkSense® System Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. ParkSense® System Usage Precautions NOTE: If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ • Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® SORS⬙ appears in the Driver Information Display (DID) system operating properly. make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and • Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense®. clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see • When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster an authorized dealer. will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn message appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer. it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 • When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. • ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone. • Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper. • Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense® system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument cluster. 3 CAUTION! • ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense®. 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. • Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors (Continued) could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the last touchscreen appears again. When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature path based on the steering wheel position. and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted the vehicle. out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into ⬙PARK⬙ The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone: or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Zone Red Yellow Green Distance to the rear of the vehicle 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater) 3 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. (Continued) • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView®. NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 OVERHEAD CONSOLE Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) and power sunroof switches may also be included, if equipped. Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time visibility. Overhead Console Front Map/Reading Lights 3 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed. Front Map/Reading Light Switches Courtesy Lights The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time. Courtesy Lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 Sunglasses Bin Door GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED At the front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the door to close. HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery. The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button. Sunglasses Bin Door 3 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming. For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system. Overhead Console HomeLink® Buttons NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 NOTE: • Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons. • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance. Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be Training The Garage Door Opener identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 1 — Door Opener opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 2 — Training Button open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. 3 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to step after the LEARN button has been pushed. program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button. 6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly activates, programming is complete. and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to from slow to rapid. complete the training. 5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Rolling Code) Programming A Non-Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, before 1995. follow these steps: 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator Do not release the button. light in view. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining program while you push and hold the hand-held steps. transmitter button. 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid. 3 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed. • To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining steps. Canadian/Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission. Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this follow these steps: Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Non-Rolling Code) 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash process to prevent possible overheating of the garage rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take door or gate motor. up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to and observe the indicator light. 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to • If the indicator light stays on constantly, programprogram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator ming is complete and the garage door/device should light in view. activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed. 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button, • To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has erase the channels. successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time. fully trained. 3 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Canadian/Gate Operator) Using HomeLink® To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink® To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, button. Activation will now occur for the programmed follow these steps: device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until time. the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Security Do not release the button. It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/ in your vehicle. Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 remaining steps. seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions: • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter. • Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code. • Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in? If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance. WARNING! • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. • Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. 3 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry SHADE — IF EQUIPPED Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following The CommandView® sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console. two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. The power shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console. NOTE: • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. • The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. CommandView® Sunroof And Power Shade Switches UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured. • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. (Continued) Opening Sunroof — Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. 3 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again. To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again. Closing Sunroof — Express Opening Power Shade — Express Press the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. Press the shade switch rearward and release it within one-half second and the shade will automatically open to the halfway position and stop automatically. Press the switch a second time from the halfway position and the shade will automatically open to the full open position and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the shade switch will stop the shade. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the half-open position. Pressing the shade close button again To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward. will automatically close both the sunroof and shade The shade will open and stop automatically at the completely. half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch rearward again and the shade will open automatically to Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the the movement and the shade will remain in a partially forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the opened condition until the switch is pushed and held movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed rearward again. condition until the switch is pushed and held forward Closing Power Shade — Express again. Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode Press the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the shade will close automatically from any position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the shade. Venting Sunroof — Express Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. 3 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent switch is pressed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent position. Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. Sunroof Maintenance NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. the glass panel. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while the turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to will cancel this feature. the battery and powered at all times. NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through NOTE: the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/ Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding • All accessories connected to the “battery” powered Your Instrument Panel” for further information. outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS discharge. Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13 Amp) • To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR® power outlet on the instrument panel and one 12 Volt knob and element must be used. (10 Amp) power outlet in the center console that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and The front power outlet is located inside the storage area other low powered electrical accessories. The power on the center stack of the instrument panel. Ignition OFF Operation 3 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power outlet located in the storage area of the center console. Front Power Outlet WARNING! Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could result. Center Console Power Outlet NOTE: If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the center console power outlet. When the Media Hub is not in use, the outlet can deliver up to 120 Watts (10 Amps). UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 If the power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the NOTE: The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear system will need to be replaced. console USB ports can be changed to “battery” powered all the time by moving the #12 20 Amp fuse from “IGN” to “B+”. Refer to “Rear Power Distribution Center Cover” in “Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)”. WARNING! Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 — #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet / Dual USB Charge Only Ports 2 — #38 Fuse 15 Amp Blue Center Console Power Outlet / Media Hub To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. 3 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage. (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 CUPHOLDERS Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console. 3 Front Cupholders Retractable Cover 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Press the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the cupholder; Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off. cupholders. The cupholders are designed to help keep Press the “Hot” symbol once to activate the cupholder; press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder. warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool. Heated And Cooled Cupholders — If Equipped WARNING! Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches When using the cupholder in the “Hot” position, avoid contact with the heated portion of the cupholder in order to reduce the possibility of burns. Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise particular care in order to prevent serious burn injury. Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects when operated in the Heat position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 Rear Seat Cupholders Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows. On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Rear Seat Cupholders Light Ring In Rear Cupholder 3 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE STORAGE Console Features There is a cubby bin located forward of the gear selector. The cubby bin is covered with a push-push actuated The glove compartment is located on the passenger side door. Push inward on the door to open it, push the door of the instrument panel. a second time to close it. Glove Compartment Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the center console armrest. Glove Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 small items like an ipod or phone. Below the upper tray, the lower storage compartment is made for larger items, like CDs and tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 volt power outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here. 3 Center Console Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an integrated coin holder, along with additional area for Upper Storage Tray 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision. Door Storage The door panels contain storage areas. Front Door Trim Storage UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling compartment. nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor. When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap. Rear Armrest Storage 3 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! • Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. • The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system. • To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts. The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle: • Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. • Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway. • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 CARGO AREA FEATURES Trunk Mat — If Equipped A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area. The trunk mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from mud, snow, and debris. 3 Grocery Bag Hooks The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks, located on either side of the rear cargo area. Grocery Bag Hooks CAUTION! Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 50 lbs (22 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to hook and mounting surface. 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Cargo Net REAR WINDOW FEATURES The rear cargo area is equipped with a cargo net. Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time. Rear Cargo Net UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Power Sunshade — If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sunshade that will reduce the amount of sunlight that will shine through the rear windshield. The power sunshade can be operated using the Uconnect® System. Press the “Controls” button and then press the “Rear Sunshade” button to raise the power sunscreen. Press the “Sunshade” button a second time to lower the sunshade. If the sunshade is in the raised position and the vehicle is placed in REVERSE, the sunshade will automatically fully lower. When the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE the sunshade will automatically return to the fully raised position after a brief delay. NOTE: The rear sunshade control switch can be locked out along with the rear passenger window controls from the driver switch window lockout switch. 3 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The power sunshade can also be operated by passengers in the rears seats. The power sunshade switch is located on the back of the center console between the heated seat switches. Press the switch once to raise the sunshade. Press the switch a second time to lower the sunshade. LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a levelriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions. A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions. If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The vehicle must be driven to reset the system. Power Sunshade Switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS 䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .265 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .267 䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .276 ▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 ▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 䡵 SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . .284 䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 ▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 ▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 ▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .307 䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .308 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .310 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 4 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 ▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .318 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 䡵 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 ▫ Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 ▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 ▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 ▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 ▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 ▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 ▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 ▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 ▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 ▫ Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . .332 ▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 ▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 ▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 ▫ Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 ▫ SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . .337 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 ▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 — Air Outlet — Driver Information Display (DID) Controls — Driver Information Display (DID) — Speed Controls — Uconnect® System — Analog Clock 7 — Glove Compartment 8 — Uconnect® System Hard Controls 9 — Switch Bank 10 — Climate Control Hard Controls 11 — Engine Start/Stop Button 12 — Trunk Release Button 13 — Headlight Switch 14 — Adaptive Cruise Control 15 —Uconnect® Phone Controls 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1. Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000). 2. High Beam Indicator This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam. 3. Brake Warning Light If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. the anti-lock brake system reservoir. 4 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light sary. inspected by an authorized dealer. WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 4. Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. 5. Driver Information Display (DID) Area driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If he/she cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero. The DID features an interactive display, for further The odometer display shows the total distance the ve- information refer to “Driver Information Display (DID).” hicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows indi- 6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped vidual trip mileage. This indicator will illuminate when the park NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon translights or headlights are turned on. fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been 4 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 7. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. 8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. 4 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator system. If this light remains on after several ignition Light — If Equipped cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conyour authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the trol (ESC) is off. problem diagnosed and corrected. 10. Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed. 11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC NOTE: • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN. • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 12. Turn Signal Indicators the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a the light inspected by an authorized dealer. continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check 14. Fuel Door Reminder for a defective outside light bulb. The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the 13. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle. This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition 15. Fuel Gauge switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when may stay on for as long as four seconds. the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, 4 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 16. Temperature Gauge CAUTION! (Continued) The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. WARNING! CAUTION! Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer (Continued) A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 17. Seat Belt Reminder Light 19. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/ RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an Onboard Diagnostic system, called OBD, that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your 18. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- drive normally and will not require towing. mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed. 4 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) The Driver Information Display (DID) features an interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster. This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pushing the arrow buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel. The DID Menu Items consists of the following: • Speedometer WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. • Vehicle Info • Driver Assist — If Equipped • Fuel Economy • Trip • Audio • Messages UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 • Screen Setup Up And Down Arrow Buttons: The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel: Using the Up or Down arrows allows you to cycles through the Main Menu Items. Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title area. Left And Right Arrow Buttons: Using the Left or Right arrow buttons allows you to cycles through the submenu items of the Main menu item. DID Controls 4 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: For Screen Setup and Vehicle Settings: • Holding the Up/Down or Left/Right arrow buttons • OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus. will loop the user through the currently selected menu • Within each submenu layer, the up/down arrows will or options presented on the screen. allow the user to select the item of interest. • Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous • Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a scrolling. confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to • Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu the 1st page of the submenu). screen viewed within that main menu will be dis• Pushing the left arrow button will exit each submenu played. layer and return to the main menu. OK Button: For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new PerforFor Digital Speedometer mance Timers): • Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h). • Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK button. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 Engine Oil Life Reset Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Oil Change Required 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to the Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will display in the DID for five seconds after a single 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil within 10 seconds. change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal OFF/LOCK position. driving style. Unless reset, this message will continue to display each NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not turn off the message temporarily, push and release the reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure. 4 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life 3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access Screen In The DID And Holding Ok the ”Oil Life” screen. Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change 4. Push and hold the OK button until the “ Oil Life” indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message screen displays. will flash in the DID display for approximately 10 5. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to select “ seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the Yes,” then push and release the OK button to select next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change reset of the Oil Life. indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent 6. Push and release the Up arrow button to exit the upon your personal driving style. submenu screen. Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you procedure(s): start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). 2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to “ Vehicle Info.” UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 DID Selectable Menu Items • Oil Life Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until • Battery Voltage the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID. • AWD Status Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired. Driver Assist Speedometer Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu Push and release the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The toggle between MPH or km/h. information displayed depends on ACC system status. Vehicle Info Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ The Vehicle Info consists of the following sub menu: OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the DID: • Tire Pressure Monitor • Coolant Temp Adaptive Cruise Control Off • Trans Temp When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” • Oil Temp • Oil Pressure 4 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Adaptive Cruise Control Ready • ACC Proximity Warning When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Unavailable Warning not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise • The DID will return to the last display selected after Control Ready.” five seconds of no ACC display activity. Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The wheel) and the following will display in the DID: Features Of Your Vehicle.” ACC SET Fuel Economy When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until instrument cluster. the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID. The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following: • Two sub menu pages one with Current value displayed and one without the Current Value displayed: • Distance Setting Change – Current MPG (or L/100 km) – Range (miles or km) • System Cancel – Average MPG (or L/100 km) • Driver Override – The Max and Min values will correspond to the • System Off particular engine requirements UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 • Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber Audio color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves. Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until • MPG will have the gauge fill from the left (clockwise). the Audio Menu displays in the DID. • L/100 km will have the gauge fill from the right Stored Messages (counter clockwise). Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until • Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information. the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Trip Info Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until what the stored messages are. the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left Screen Setup or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until will display the following: the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and • Distance release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is • Average Fuel Economy displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location • Elapsed Time that information is displayed. Hold the OK button to reset feature information. 4 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK Uconnect® SETTINGS To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on panel, push and hold the button until the setting is the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on correct. the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features. CAUTION! Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen. Setting The Analog Clock UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF). Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and Back buttons on the faceplate. Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate 1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect® screen. Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate a second time to turn the screen on. Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect® system. 4 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Buttons On The Touchscreen NOTE: Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the • Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time. Uconnect® Touchscreen. • Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings Customer Programmable Features — may vary. Uconnect® 8.4 Settings When making a selection, press the button on the touchPress the “Apps,” or the “Controls,” button on the touch- screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired screen, then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen mode, press and release the preferred setting until a to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, features that may be equipped such as Display, Units, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. PressOptions, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Re- ing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the store Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Informa- screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the tion. available settings. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 Display • Display Brightness With Headlights ON After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen When in this display, you may select the brightness with the the following settings will be available: headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point • Display Mode on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchWhen in this display you may select one of the auto screen. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. display settings. To change Mode status, press and release the “Manual” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen. NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display ⬙parade⬙ positions. Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control • Display Brightness With Headlights OFF even though the headlights are on. When in this display, you may select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. 4 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with • Touchscreen Beep Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the ⬙parade⬙ positions. touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” • Set Theme — If Equipped button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been seThis feature will allow you to choose a theme for the display lected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to screen. The theme will change the background color, highreturn to the previous menu. light color, and button color of the display screen. • Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped • Set Language When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will When in this display, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lanappears next to the setting, showing that setting has been guage button on the touchscreen until a check-mark selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen appears next to the language, showing that setting has to return to the previous menu. been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 • Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped • Distance When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Select from: “mi” or “km.” Units After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measure are listed below: • Speed Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.” • Fuel Consumption Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or “km/L.” • Pressure Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.” • Temperature Select from: “°C,” or “°F.” After the desired setting has been selected, press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. 4 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Voice Clock After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: following settings will be available: • Voice Response Length • Sync Time With GPS When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. This feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Show Command List • Set Time Hours When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List settings, press the “Always,” “With Help” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 • Set Time Minutes • Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. • Time Format This feature will allow you to select the time format display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Safety & Driving Assistance After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: • Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This 4 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far” button. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning Active Braking” button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. For further information, refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.” • LaneSense Warning — If Equipped For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con- When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential Vehicle”. lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking provide either an “Early,” “Medium,” or “Late” warning zone start point. The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vebrake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The hicle”. ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 • LaneSense Strength — If Equipped provide greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort. Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the provide a balance of steering feel and steering effort. steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return The amount of directional torque the steering system can to the previous menu. apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane • ParkSense® departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.” For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn- The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It Vehicle”. will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate • Power Steering — If Equipped the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled When your vehicle is not equipped with Performance with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the Control, the Steering Feel Options feature will allow you ParkSense® status, press and release the “Sound Only” to adjust the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” or “Sound and Display” button. Then press the back button on the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense®” of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for effort. Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to system function and operating information. 4 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Front ParkSense® Volume on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return selected from the DID or Uconnect® System. The chime to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The known configuration state through ignition cycles. factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the “Front ParkSense® Vol.” button • Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their known configuration state through ignition cycles. previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side • Rear ParkSense® Volume Mirrors in Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the selected from the DID or Uconnect® System. The chime setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense® Vol.” button UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 • Blind Spot Alert Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature in the BSM not operating to specification. Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be • ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) display along with a caution note to “check entire sursystem is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert roundings” across the top of the screen. After five secstatus, press the “Off,” “Lights” or “Lights & Chime” onds, this note will disappear. To make your selection, button on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears button on the touchscreen. next to setting, indicating that the setting had been NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is to return to the previous menu. not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. 4 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • ParkView® Backup Camera Delay • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of “REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into “PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the “Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings” button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup Camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView® Delay ON or OFF. When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Hill Start Assist — If Equipped When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button following settings will be available. on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or • Headlight Off Delay push the back button on the faceplate. Lights When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting, press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. • Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next • Headlight Illumination On Approach to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors to the previous menu, or push the back button on the are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) faceplate. 4 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights push the back button on the faceplate. will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High • Flash Lights With Lock Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch- Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the screen to return to the previous menu, or push the back passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with button on the faceplate. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped” or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” further information. button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears • Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on to return to the previous menu, or push the back button whenever the engine is running. To make your selection, on the faceplate. press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchmake your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” screen the following settings will be available: button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears • Auto Unlock On Exit next to setting, indicating that the setting has been When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or to return to the previous menu. NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To • Sound Horn With Lock make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when next to the setting, showing that the setting has been the door locks are activated. To make your selection, selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to to return to the previous menu. setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the • Flash Lights With Lock back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash previous menu. when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the Doors & Locks 4 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/ unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 • Passive Entry enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory • Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob On/Off — If Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” Equipped for further information. This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to 4 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped Engine Off Options After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: touchscreen the following settings will be available: • Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start” or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Balance/Fade This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. • Equalizer This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the directly on the desired setting. following settings will be available. Audio 4 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Speed Adjusted Volume button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return This feature increases or decreases volume relative to to the previous menu. vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen. • Loudness — If Equipped Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To to the previous menu. make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the • Surround Sound — If Equipped touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. menu. To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the Phone/Bluetooth® back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the previous menu. touchscreen the following settings will be available: • AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped • Paired Phones This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level This feature shows which phones are paired to the for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 • Paired Audio Sources • Subscription Information This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual. services, it will be necessary to access the information on SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe. After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchPress the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen screen, the following settings will be available: to access the Subscription Information screen. • Channel Skip Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of reactivate your service, either call the number listed on channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to the screen or visit the provider online. exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip and is available for U.S. residents only. followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen. 4 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Restore Settings Clear Personal Data After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on touchscreen the following settings will be available: the touchscreen the following settings will be available: • Restore Settings • Clear Personal Data When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit. When this feature is selected it will remove personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared”. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 System Information After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen the following information will be available: The Media hub also allows the use of an SD card. For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual. • System Information When System Information is selected, a System Information screen will appear displaying the system software version. 4 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio, refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual. iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL This feature allows an iPod® or an external USB device to be plugged into the USB port. iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please visit Apple’s website for software updates. AUX/USB/SD Card Ports 1 — Aux Jack 2 — USB Port 3 — SD Card Slot 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Located on the rear of the front center console are dual STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS USB “Charge Only” ports. The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock positions. Rear USB Charging Ports The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery operated USB devices when connected. Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button. CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE — IF EQUIPPED Pushing the center button will make the radio switch To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ precautions: AUX/VES, etc.). 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface. The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, control is different depending on which mode you are in. wiping from center to edge. The following describes the left-hand control operation in 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratcheach mode. ing the disc. Radio Operation 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays. Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. will “Seek” down for the next listenable station. 4 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become turned down or off during mobile phone operation when too high. not using Uconnect® (if equipped). NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat- CLIMATE CONTROLS 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) The air conditioning and heating system is designed to oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known make you comfortable in all types of weather. This good disc before considering disc player service. system can be operated through either the controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system disRADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES play. Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Rayour vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from dio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is display. not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons On The Touchscreen Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen. The buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® screen. 4 Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons On The Touchscreen Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The Faceplate 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The 4. AUTO Operation Button Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen) Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by 1. MAX A/C Button adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing Press and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the system to switch between indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information. switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button will turn off. Press and release to change the current airflow setting to 2. A/C Button Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feaPress and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this window demist outlets. When the defrost button is function again will cause the A/C operation to switch selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing 3. Recirculation Button this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual Press and release to change the current setting, the mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting. indicator illuminates when ON. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 6. Rear Defrost Button CAUTION! (Continued) Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. 7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. (Continued) Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for warmer temperature settings. NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync. 4 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button 10. Blower Control Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler temperature settings. Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen as follows: NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate automatically exit Sync. The blower speed increases as you turn the blower 9. SYNC control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated control knob counterclockwise. when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem- Button On The Touchscreen perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature. and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 11. Modes • Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, directed through the defrost and side window demisdefrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are ter outlets. as follows: • Panel Mode NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conAir comes from the outlets in the instrument ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and panel. Each of these outlets can be individu- warmer air from the floor outlets. ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of • Floor Mode the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight up and down or side to side to regulate airflow amount of air is directed through the defrost direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the and side window demister outlets. air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow • Mix Mode from these outlets. Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions. 4 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control time. ON/OFF. Climate Control Functions 13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera- The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into temperature settings. the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time. adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make 14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes. 12. Climate Control OFF Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con- NOTE: trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for needed. warmer temperature settings. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than Recirculation Control expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (loWhen outside air contains smoke, odors, or cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from you may wish to recirculate interior air by the front of the radiator and through the condenser. pressing the Recirculation control button. The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is MAX A/C selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle. mance. NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if ON. conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting selected setting and MAX A/C to exit. to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off. 4 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) NOTE: • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, 1. Press the AUTO button on the faceplate or the AUTO mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperaas possible. ture Control (ATC) Panel. • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasfeature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in senger temperature control buttons. Once the desired this section of the manual. temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic automatically maintain that comfort level. mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is on low until the engine warms up. The blower will not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- increase in speed and transition into Auto mode. ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. Automatic Operation UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 Manual Operation Override Operating Tips The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con- suggested control settings for various weather conditrol. tions. The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode. Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) The operator can also select the direction of the airflow coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended. operation and Recirculation control can also be manually Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection. selected in Manual operation. NOTE: Each of these features operates independently from each other. If any feature is controlled manually, temperature control will continue to operate automatically. 4 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Winter Operation Window Fogging Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly reis not recommended because it may cause window moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The fogging. Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side winVacation Storage dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the but rainy or humid weather. fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility NOTE: of compressor damage when the system is started again. • Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long periods, as fogging may occur. • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 Outside Air Intake A/C Air Filter Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. The climate control system filters outside air containing dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions. 4 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a Uconnect® 8.4A system. Introducing Uconnect® Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands Get Started and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0 All you need to control your Uconnect® system with or 8.4A/8.4AN system. your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel. 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions. 2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition. Uconnect® 8.4AN 4 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver. 4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command. 5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category. Uconnect® Voice Command 1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text 2 — For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For 8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions 3 — Push To End Call UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 Basic Voice Commands The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect® system. Push the VR button . After the beep, say: • Cancel to stop a current voice session 4 • Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands • Repeat to listen to the system prompts again Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen. Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.) Push the VR button . After the beep, say: • Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM • Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of commands. Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth® Command must match exactly how the artist, album, and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only song and genre information is displayed. available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.) Media 4 . After the beep, say one of the Push the VR button following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist. • Change source to Bluetooth® • Change source to iPod® • Change source to USB • Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Phone Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions. TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say “Call,” then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.” . After the beep, say one of Push the Phone button the following commands: • Call John Smith • Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts • Redial (call previous outgoing phone number) • Call back (call previous incoming phone number) Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 Voice Text Reply Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.) 1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push . After the beep, say: “Reply.” the Phone button 2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts. PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later. Start without No. I’ll be Late. me. Okay. Where are you? I will be minutes Are you there Call me. late. yet? I’ll call you I need See you in later. directions. of minutes. I’m on my way. Can’t talk right now. I’m lost. Thanks. TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. 4 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.) . After the beep, say one of the Push the VR button following commands: • Set driver temperature to 70 degrees • Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped. Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate navigation at any time.) 1. To enter a destination, push the VR button the beep, say: 4 . After • For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: “Enter state.” • For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.” 2. Then follow the system prompts. TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button After the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.” . Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN) Remote Door Lock/Unlock An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access, press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on the next page. Stolen Vehicle Assistance Remote Vehicle Start** Remote Horn and Lights Yelp® Search Voice Texting *Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped veRoadside Assistance Call hicles purchased within the continental United States and Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is Wi-Fi Hotspot*** available; see coverage map for details. **If vehicle is equipped. 9-1-1 Call ***Extra charges apply. Theft Alarm Notification UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 Register (8.4A/8.4AN) 1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch touchscreen. 2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Registration. 4 3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and confirm your personal email address. Then press Send. 4. Check your personal inbox for an email from Uconnect® Access. 5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and complete the easy online registration process to create a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to your vehicle. Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do is: Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the 1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually to your Mopar® Owner Connect account at any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with moparownerconnect.com. factory-installed Remote Start.) 2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone number to receive a link to download the App on your mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and search for the Uconnect® Access App. Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) 3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is then connected to your mobile device. Mobile App UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice to send a personalized text message. 1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After the beep, say the following command: “Send mesTIP: sage to John Smith.” 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the • Not compatible with iPhone®. message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect® • Messages are limited to 140 characters. to process your message. • The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be 3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and illuminated to use the feature. provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect® what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.” 4 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display. your voice to search for the most popular places or things around you. Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN) 1. Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen. 2. Press the “All Apps” button on the touchscreen. 3. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen. 4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touch, then say: “YELP screen, push the VR button search.” 5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell Uconnect® the place or business that you’d like Uconnect® to find. Yelp® UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN) Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN system. (Not available for 8.4A system.) 4 . After the beep, say one of the Push the VR button following commands: • Show fuel prices • Show 5 - day weather forecast • Show extended weather TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command. SiriusXM Travel Link™ 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical speciThis device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry fications were met. Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Additional Information General Information © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner 2. This device must accept any interference that may be Connect is a trademark of Chrysler Group LLC. Android is received including interference that may cause unde- a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks sired operation. and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks NOTE: of Yelp. • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 Uconnect® System Support: • U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 or visit DriveUconnect.com • Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when you call. 4 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS 䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .351 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 ▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .353 ▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 ▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .354 ▫ Extreme Cold Weather 䡵 AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . (Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .351 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 . .364 . .365 . .365 . .365 5 342 STARTING AND OPERATING 䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 ▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 ▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .383 䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 ▫ Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .373 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .388 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .373 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .389 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .375 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .391 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .396 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .377 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 STARTING AND OPERATING 343 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .412 ▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .399 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .417 ▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 ▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 ▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 ▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 ▫ 5.7L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .425 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .409 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .411 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 5 344 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 ▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 ▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 ▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 ▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 ▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .435 ▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .435 ▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 ▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .430 ▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . ▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer ▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 ▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 ▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .434 . . . .436 . . . .437 . . . .437 . . . .440 . . . .441 . . . .442 STARTING AND OPERATING 345 ▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 ▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . . . .450 5 346 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING! (Continued) Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. WARNING! • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. (Continued) • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear. STARTING AND OPERATING 347 CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed. • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Keyless Enter-N-Go™ This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob is in the passenger compartment. 5 Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds. 348 STARTING AND OPERATING 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the button again. NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button 1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the DID will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll. NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the transmission is in 3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the seconds or three short presses in a row with the OFF position. 2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position. STARTING AND OPERATING 349 ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position) Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (availThe ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an able from your authorized dealer) is recommended. ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN. If Engine Fails To Start To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps: WARNING! 1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position: 2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change the ignition to the ACC position. 3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to change the ignition to the RUN position. 4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF position. 5 • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury. (Continued) 350 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE START/STOP Button) If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel: 1. Press and hold the brake pedal. 2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. 3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. STARTING AND OPERATING 351 After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution. The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a WARNING! grounded, three-wire extension cord. The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in rethe driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit is located near the air box. someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (Continued) 5 352 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 353 CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear shifting out of PARK. selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. 5 354 STARTING AND OPERATING Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic gear selector located on the center console. The transmission gear range (PRNDL/S) is displayed both above the gear selector and in the Driver Information Display (DID). To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. To access the L or S position, push down on the gear selector and then rotate it. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving. The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers). Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears. STARTING AND OPERATING 355 Standard Shifter Premium Shifter with AutoStick The standard transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW position manually downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed. The premium transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (shift paddles mounted on the steering wheel). Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information. Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold. Gear Selector 5 356 STARTING AND OPERATING PARK (P) This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. WARNING! • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 357 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) 5 358 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: REVERSE (R) • Before moving the transmission gear selector out of This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into PARK, you must start the engine and also press the REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector stop. could result. NEUTRAL (N) • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage periods with the engine running. Apply the parking the drivetrain. brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must The following indicator should be used to ensure that leave the vehicle. you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position: WARNING! • With brake pedal released, look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P). Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. STARTING AND OPERATING 359 CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. DRIVE (D) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift control (if equipped; refer to AutoStick in this section for further information) or the LOW range (if equipped) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level. 5 360 STARTING AND OPERATING SPORT (S) — If Equipped are all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide improved throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may be activated and deactivated by pushing the Sport button on the instrument panel switch bank. This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. To access SPORT mode, push down on the gear selector and rotate it fully clockwise, or press the SPORT button in the Transmission Limp Home Mode center stack. LOW (L) — If Equipped Use this range for engine braking when descending very steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it fully clockwise. Sport Mode — If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast driving. The engine, transmission and steering systems Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary. STARTING AND OPERATING 361 In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomcan be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your following steps: earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en- recur. gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer location (preferably, at your authorized dealer). service is required. 1. Stop the vehicle. AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. providing manual shift control, giving you more control 3. Press and hold the ignition switch until the engine of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine turns OFF. braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. can also provide you with more control during passing, 5. Restart the engine. city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no trailer towing, and many other situations. longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. 5 362 STARTING AND OPERATING In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will will operate automatically, shifting between the eight remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downavailable gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap one of shift is chosen, except as described below. the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in DRIVE or SPORT mode. In DRIVE mode, this will • If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the transmission will automatically shift up when maxiactivate a temporary AutoStick mode. The transmission mum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fully will revert back to normal operation after a period of depressed, the transmission will downshift when postime, depending on accelerator pedal activity. When the sible (based on current vehicle speed and gear). Lack transmission gear selector is in the SPORT position, of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmistapping either shift paddle will activate ⬙permanent⬙ sion to revert to automatic operation. AutoStick mode. The transmission will remain in AutoStick mode until the driver deliberately disables • If AutoStick is engaged while the transmission gear AutoStick (as described below). Tapping (-) to enter selector is in the SPORT position, manual gear selecAutoStick will downshift the transmission to the next tion will be maintained until the gear selector is lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick will retain returned to DRIVE, or as described below. The transthe current gear. When AutoStick is active, the current mission will not upshift automatically at redline in this transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster. mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor. Operation STARTING AND OPERATING 363 • In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to preAutoStick is engaged. vent engine lugging) and will display the current gear. • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a • The transmission will automatically downshift to first fault or overheat condition is detected. gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold the (+) shift paddle until ⬙D⬙ or ⬙S⬙ is once again indicated in the vehicle is accelerated. instrument cluster. Shifting out of SPORT mode will also • You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear. disable AutoStick. You can shift in or out of AutoStick Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in second gear. mode at any time without taking your foot off the Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or accelerator pedal. icy conditions. • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur. • The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed. • Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed. WARNING! Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury. 5 364 STARTING AND OPERATING Sport Mode or activating the windshield wipers for an extended period of time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, can This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand be found in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understandoptimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear NOTE: If the “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM” warning meswheels as necessary. sage appears after engine start up, or during driving, it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automatiand that service is required. Refer to “Driver Information cally defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is Panel” for further information. unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental conditions require increased levels of road traction, the CAUTION! vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera- All wheels must have the same size and type tires. ture, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel size may cause failure of the front differential and/or slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually se- the transfer case. lected by activating AutoStick mode (+/-), engaging ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED STARTING AND OPERATING 365 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Traction Acceleration When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed: Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving) wheels. WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.). • Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy. • Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. • Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. • Keep tires properly inflated. • Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. 5 366 STARTING AND OPERATING Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling. WARNING! (Continued) your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. and Warnings before doing so. Flowing/Rising Water WARNING! WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry (Continued) • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 367 WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. CAUTION! • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. (Continued) (Continued) 5 368 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! (Continued) • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ELECTRIC POWER STEERING Equipped” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” chapter for further information. WARNING! Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERlight efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If VICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER the electric steering system experiences a fault that STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM” prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the message is displayed within the Driver Inforability to steer the vehicle manually. mation Display (DID), this indicates the vehicle needs to Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to “Driver through the Uconnect® System. Refer to ”Customer Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Programmable Features” or “Performance Control — If Instrument Panel” for further information. STARTING AND OPERATING 369 NOTE: PARKING BRAKE • Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever/gear selector in the PARK position. The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a service. second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE disengage. ONLY — IF EQUIPPED This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required. NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect. 5 370 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: • When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle. • This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking Parking Brake brake before placing the shift lever/gear selector in When the parking brake is applied with the ignition PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift the instrument cluster will illuminate. lever/gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 371 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever/gear selector. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. (Continued) 5 372 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake Warning Light.” In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating. NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high performance braking system. The brake pads are a semimetallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and operating conditions (.i.e., during light brake applications) this is considered normal conditions. STARTING AND OPERATING 373 The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic control of available braking forces applied to the rear brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake Sysaxle. tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC). When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you All four of these systems work together to enhance may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some vehicle stability and control in various driving condi- related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is tions. working properly. This self check occurs each time the Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Hill Start Assist vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h). (HSA), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support. ABS is activated during braking under certain road or Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can inThe Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose vehicle stability and brake performance under most debris, or panic stops. braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock-up. ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 5 374 STARTING AND OPERATING You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti-Lock: • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop). • The clicking sound of solenoid valves. • Brake pedal pulsations. • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop. These are all normal characteristics of ABS. WARNING! • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals. • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 375 WARNING! (Continued) • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Traction Control System (TCS) This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Sport Mode (Partial Off)” or ⬙Track Mode (Full Off)⬙ mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for more informaAll vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and tion. type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer. 5 376 STARTING AND OPERATING Brake Assist System (BAS) This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency brake maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. WARNING! The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. STARTING AND OPERATING 377 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path. The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. WARNING! The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. 5 378 STARTING AND OPERATING The “ESC Off” switch is located on the switch bank in the The ESC system has two or three available operating center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch and the modes: ⬙ESC off indicator light⬙ will illuminate. To turn the ESC ESC On on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch and the ⬙ESC off indicator light⬙ will turn off. This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this WARNING! mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions. The ESC should only be turned OFF for • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature deESC Operating Modes Partial Off The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows. scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. • Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. STARTING AND OPERATING 379 NOTE: • To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn the ESC on again by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion. Full Off — If Equipped This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the ⬙ESC Off Indicator Lamp⬙ will illuminate, and the “ESC off” message may appear in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver In• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of formation Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your InESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in strument Panel” for further information. To turn ESC ON the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch. Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC function normally. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. 5 380 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. ⴖESC Offⴖ mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only. Hill Start Assist (HSA) The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel. HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate: • Vehicle must be stopped. • Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or greater hill. • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear). HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met. The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK. STARTING AND OPERATING 381 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. released, there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. • HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake, it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer. WARNING! • If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the brake pedal is (Continued) 5 382 STARTING AND OPERATING HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done in the Uconnect® settings. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙ for further information. Rain Brake Support Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not Ready Alert Braking function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and reach full braking during emergency braking situations. no driver interaction is required. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly, Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes. STARTING AND OPERATING 383 The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON position. It should go out with the engine NOTE: running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator • Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a will be ON even if it was cycled off previously. malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authowhen ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem that caused the ESC activation. diagnosed and corrected. ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off or full off. 5 384 STARTING AND OPERATING Synchronizing ESC TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings If the power supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or discharged), the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” may illuminate with the engine running. If this should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right. The “ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light” should go out. However, if the light remains on, have the ESC and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades STARTING AND OPERATING 385 • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall precedmolded into the sidewall preceding the size designaing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H. • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • European — Metric tire sizing is based on European emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comdesign standards. Tires designed to this standard have pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire T145/80D18 103M. size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. NOTE: 5 386 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or T or S = Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) – Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code – ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or – ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) STARTING AND OPERATING 387 EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index – A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol – A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions – The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: • XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or • LL = Light load tire or • C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 5 388 STARTING AND OPERATING Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Tire Identification Number (TIN) EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation – This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 03 means the 3rd week STARTING AND OPERATING 389 EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 01 means the year 2001 – Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 5 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). 390 STARTING AND OPERATING Term Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. STARTING AND OPERATING 391 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. 5 Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) Example Tire Placard Location (Door) 392 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Loading Tire And Loading Information Placard The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual. STARTING AND OPERATING 393 NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard. “Vehicle Loading” in this section. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and To determine the maximum loading conditions of your passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here. 5 394 STARTING AND OPERATING 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE: cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the ing table shows examples on how to calculate total amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) = ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration 650 lbs [295 kg]). purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo and load carry capacity of your vehicle. being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not • For the following example, the combined weight of safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs capacity calculated in step 4. (392 kg). STARTING AND OPERATING 395 5 396 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Safety and Vehicle Stability • Economy • Tread Wear • Ride Comfort Safety WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 397 WARNING! (Continued) • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement. of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability response or over responsiveness in the steering. Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. NOTE: Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride. erratic and unpredictable steering response. • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. 5 398 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door. At least once a month: Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. temperature changes. CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter. STARTING AND OPERATING 399 Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition. important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. WARNING! Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). 5 400 STARTING AND OPERATING Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information. Radial Ply Tires WARNING! Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires. Tire Repair Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Tire Types All Season Tires — If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary bemeets the following criteria: tween different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on • The tire has not been driven on when flat. the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and (sidewall damage is not repairable). handling of your vehicle. • The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). STARTING AND OPERATING 401 Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped WARNING! Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle the possibility of loss of vehicle control. when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if Snow Tires roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informaSome areas of the country require the use of snow tires tion, contact an authorized dealer. during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use If you need snow tires, select tires summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may equivalent in size and type to the origiadversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. 5 402 STARTING AND OPERATING Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediand traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat checked before using these tire types. mode. See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information. STARTING AND OPERATING 403 rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit tire rotation pattern. instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. Spare Tires — If Equipped CAUTION! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 80D18 103M. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipwheel equivalent in look and function to the original ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle on your vehicle at the first opportunity. of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire 5 404 STARTING AND OPERATING Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time. WARNING! Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Full Size Spare — If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as STARTING AND OPERATING 405 your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Tire Spinning original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not first opportunity. spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopWARNING! ping. Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 5 406 STARTING AND OPERATING These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information. Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: • Driving style. • Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire • Distance driven. STARTING AND OPERATING 407 • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended. Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivaWARNING! lent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to “Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for You could lose control and have a collision resulting the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original in serious injury or death. equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart exKeep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact manual for more information relating to the Load Index with oil, grease, and gasoline. and Speed Symbol of a tire. 5 408 STARTING AND OPERATING It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. WARNING! • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. STARTING AND OPERATING 409 CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage. • Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer. • Install on Rear Tires Only. • Due to limited clearance for a Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) vehicle, on P215/65R17, P225/60R18 and P235/55R18 tires with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended. • Due to limited clearance for an All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle, P245/45R20 tire with the use of a traction device that meets the SAE type “Class S” specification is recommended. • No other tire sizes are recommended for use with a tire chain or traction device. WARNING! Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision. 5 410 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: • Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use. • Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. • Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. • Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). • Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 411 The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross” shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at does not apply to some directional tires that must not be different loads and perform different steering, driving, reversed. and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. 5 Tire Rotation 412 STARTING AND OPERATING The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. mended cold placard pressure. TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. STARTING AND OPERATING 413 For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your local dealer to have your sensor function checked. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPM sensor. 5 414 STARTING AND OPERATING • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care tire. and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure Base System or condition. NOTE: • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to while adjusting your tire pressure. monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may readings to the receiver module. affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain and to maintain the proper pressure. correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light. STARTING AND OPERATING 415 The TPMS consists of the following components: Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings • Receiver module • Four TPM sensors • TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound. The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. 5 416 STARTING AND OPERATING Service TPMS Warning Vehicles With Full Size Spare If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will 1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the 2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning system fault still exists. The TPM Telltale Light will turn limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system sound and the TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ fault can occur due to any of the following: message will turn ON. The ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving will also be displayed. next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as 3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph the TPM sensors. (24 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light and 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message as long as no tire pressure is materials that may block radio wave signals. below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. STARTING AND OPERATING 417 Vehicles With Compact Spare 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW Premium System — If Equipped TIRE⬙ message will turn ON. The ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless message will also be displayed. technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each 15 mph (24 km/h), the ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will turn wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure off and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for readings to the receiver module. 75 seconds and then remain on solid. NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the 4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off and to maintain the proper pressure. for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 5 418 STARTING AND OPERATING The TPMS consists of the following components: Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings • Receiver module The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when • Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the DID will display a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ Information Display (DID) message and a graphic showing the pressure values of • TPM Telltale Light each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing or The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if changing color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be displayed. used in place of any of the four road tires. The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare tire when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound. • Four TPM sensors STARTING AND OPERATING 419 automatically update, the graphic display in the DID will stop flashing or change color back to the original color, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. 5 Tire Pressure Monitor Display Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those flashing or in a different color in the DID graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display 420 STARTING AND OPERATING Service TPMS Warning 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals. If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the wheel housings. DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. not being received. The DID will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, message for a minimum of five seconds when a system providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no message is then followed with a graphic display with longer display, and a pressure value will display in place pressure values still shown. This indicates that the presof the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors following: but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed. next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors. STARTING AND OPERATING 421 Vehicles With Full Size Spare Vehicles With Compact Spare 1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS. the compact spare tire. 2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnlimit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In addition, the DID will display a low pressure message Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the DID will still display a and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing pressure value or a pressure value in a flashing or in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed. different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on OFF, and the pressure value displayed will be updated and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In and stop flashing or return to its original color as long addition, the DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and limit in any of the four active road tires. then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. 5 422 STARTING AND OPERATING 4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired opreinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, eration. the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followthe DID will display a new pressure value instead of ing licenses: dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the MRXMERCTX1 low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active United States road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to Canada 2546A-MERCTX1 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. STARTING AND OPERATING 423 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3.6L Engine — If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines. 5.7L Engine — If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available. 5 424 STARTING AND OPERATING Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components. CAUTION! DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol. Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may genates such as Ethanol. not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends STARTING AND OPERATING 425 To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso- E-85 perform the following: line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher • Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer). ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited • Change the engine oil and oil filter. Warranty. E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 • Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory. fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged • Operate in a lean mode. exposure to E-85 fuel. • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. MMT In Gasoline • Poor engine performance. Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is • Poor cold start and cold drivability. blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug 5 426 STARTING AND OPERATING life and reduces emissions system performance in some Fuel System Cautions vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content CAUTION! of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal performance: • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. and California reformulated gasoline. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perforMaterials Added To Fuel mance and damage the emissions control system. • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition All gasoline sold in the United States is required to malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or detergents or other additives is not needed under normal some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune conditions and they would result in additional cost. or malfunctioning and may require immediate serTherefore, you should not have to add anything to the vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service fuel. assistance. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 427 CAUTION! (Continued) • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer. NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. (Continued) 5 428 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED E-85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles. CAUTION! Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on E-85. Ethanol Fuel (E-85) E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. WARNING! Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame. STARTING AND OPERATING 429 Fuel Requirements NOTE: If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels. hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed, especially For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternatwhen the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C). ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that: engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be • You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline refueling. additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used. • You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles (8 km). mended. Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up. 5 430 STARTING AND OPERATING Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395. Starting The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up. NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C). Cruising Range Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon (mpg)/Kilometers per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation. STARTING AND OPERATING 431 Replacement Parts ADDING FUEL Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are 1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located in the designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure driver’s door map pocket). that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts. CAUTION! 5 Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle. Maintenance CAUTION! Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability. Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 432 STARTING AND OPERATING 2. Open the fuel filler door. 3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system. 4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling. NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the flapper door to open. 5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full. 6. Maintain nozzle in filler for 5 seconds to allow nozzle to drain. Fuel Filler Door 7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door. NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the emergency refueling with a gas can. door. STARTING AND OPERATING 433 WARNING! Fuel Funnel CAUTION! To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on. • A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling. 5 434 STARTING AND OPERATING Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release 3. Pull the release cable. If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel filler door emergency release. 1. Open the trunk. 2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner trim panel). Release Cable Access Cover STARTING AND OPERATING 435 VEHICLE LOADING • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information • Type of Vehicle should be used for passenger and luggage loading as • Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH) indicated. Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN. (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Vehicle Certification Label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door. load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. The label contains the following information: Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) • Name of manufacturer The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear • Month and year of manufacture axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles • Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front 5 436 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. Overloading The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR. Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles. Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR. Loading To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before The best way to figure out the total weight of your driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect it is not over the GVWR. on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate. STARTING AND OPERATING 437 NOTE: Common Towing Definitions • Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the The following trailer towing related definitions will assist rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and you in understanding the following information: GAWRs. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) • Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. tire pressure. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification In this section you will find safety tips and information Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temand safely as possible. porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to follow the requirements and recommendations in this measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale. TRAILER TOWING 5 438 STARTING AND OPERATING Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Tongue Weight (TW) The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the and trailer when weighed in combination. hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight is 10% to 15% for a conventional hitch. You must consider Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) this as part of the load on your vehicle. The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear Frontal Area axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- maximum width of the front of a trailer. tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further Trailer Sway Control information. The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue WARNING! that typically provides adjustable friction associated with It is important that you do not exceed the maximum the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition swaying motions while traveling. can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. STARTING AND OPERATING 439 Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized WARNING! trailers. Weight-Carrying Hitch Weight-Distributing Hitch A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. • An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision. • Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information. 5 440 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg) Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg) Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain. All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 441 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain. Engine/Transmission 3.6L Automatic 5.7L Automatic Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds. Frontal Area NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. Max. Tongue Weight (See Note) 100 lbs (45 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg) 5 442 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions. Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. STARTING AND OPERATING 443 Consider the following items when computing the Towing Requirements weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive• The tongue weight of the trailer. train components the following guidelines are recom• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment mended: put in or on your vehicle. • The weight of the driver and all passengers. NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle. WARNING! Improper towing can lead to an injury collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision. (Continued) 5 444 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires. • Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels. • GCWR must not be exceeded. • Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded: (Continued) 1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. 2. GTW 3. GAWR 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.) STARTING AND OPERATING 445 CAUTION! • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. • Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. • Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage. • Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure. • When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on replacement tires and for the proper tire replaceTowing Requirements — Tires ment procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR • Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact and GAWR limits. spare tire. • Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures. 5 446 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury. • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required. • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg). WARNING! • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision. • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision. CAUTION! If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. STARTING AND OPERATING 447 Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector. 5 NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness. The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations. 1 — Female Pins 2 — Male Pin 3 — Ground Four-Pin Connector 4 — Park 5 — Left Stop/Turn 6 — Right Stop/Turn 448 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic. Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear. Seven-Pin Connector 1 2 3 4 — — — — Battery Backup Lamps Right Stop/Turn Electric Brakes 5 — Ground 6 — Left Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also provide better engine braking. STARTING AND OPERATING 449 • To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road • When using the speed control, if you experience speed conditions allow. drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed. Cooling System • Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to To reduce potential for engine and transmission overmaximize fuel efficiency. heating, take the following actions: Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped AutoStick — If Equipped City Driving • When using the AutoStick shift control, select the When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transhighest gear that allows for adequate performance and mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed. avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or Highway Driving “3” if needed to maintain the desired speed. Reduce speed. Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily. 5 450 STARTING AND OPERATING RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground. CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS 䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .452 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .464 䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .452 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 ▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .455 ▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .456 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 ▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 ▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .473 ▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .475 ▫ Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models . . . . . . . . . .475 ▫ Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 6 452 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery. The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel between the center air IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS outlets. In any of the following situations, you can reduce the Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning potential for overheating by taking the appropriate acflashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- tion. tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • On the highways — slow down. traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle This is an emergency warning system and it should not speed. be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition: other motorists. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 453 • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for service. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench. 6 454 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Torque Specifications Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Bolt Size 130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m) M14 x 1.50 Lug Nut/ Bolt Socket Size 22 mm **Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. Wheel Mounting Surface Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 455 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING! Torque Patterns WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. (Continued) 6 456 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! (Continued) • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire. Opening The Access Panel NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to 3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire. access the jack. 1. Open the trunk. 2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 457 6 Spare Tire Fastener 4. Remove the spare tire. 5. Remove the fastener securing the jack. Jack Fastener 6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack assembly. 458 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Place the shift lever/gear selector into PARK. 5. Turn OFF the ignition. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For Preparations For Jacking example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel. 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas. WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 459 Jacking And Changing A Tire WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. Jack Warning Label (Continued) 6 460 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. 1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench. 2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle. 3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to Jacking Locations loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one 4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to turn while the wheel is still on the ground. the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 461 NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide the jack on its side and rotate it up into position. 6 Rear Jacking Location Front Jacking Location 5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire. 462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. 6. Remove the lug nuts and tire. 7. Mount the spare tire. CAUTION! Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly. Mounting Spare Tire WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463 9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. • For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. 10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased • Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug “Starting and Operating” for additional warnings, nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this cautions, and information about the spare tire, its section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have use, and operation. them checked with a torque wrench by your autho8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug rized dealer or at a service station. nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. 11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before WARNING! tightening down the fastener. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. NOTE: 6 464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately. Road Tire Installation 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 4. Refer to Torque Table for proper lug nut torque. 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel. JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465 CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. WARNING! Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. Preparations For Jump-Start 6 Remote Battery Post Locations The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. 1 — Remote Positive (+) Post Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the 2 — Remote Negative (-) Post engine compartment for jump-starting. 466 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. 3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Jump-Starting Procedure WARNING! Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 467 CAUTION! WARNING! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. Connecting The Jumper Cables 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. 6 468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence: Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. CAUTION! Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE positive (+) post of the booster battery. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the vehicle. front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use you should have the battery and charging system in- the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the spected at your authorized dealer. wheels or racing the engine. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 469 NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE. NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode. CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. CAUTION! • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). 6 470 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. MANUAL PARK RELEASE WARNING! Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle. In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 471 Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release: 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the tether strap up through the opening in the console base. 2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual 4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the Park Release lever. lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing it to the right. 6 Manual Park Release Lever Location Locking Tab Location 472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged To Reset The Manual Park Release: position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and 1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side) rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position. rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is 2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and securely connected to a tow vehicle. down, to its original position, until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever. 3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever is locked in its stowed position. 4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console. Reinstall the console storage bin. Tether Strap Location WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 473 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Flatbed Wheels OFF The Ground NONE RWD MODELS AWD MODELS NOT ALLOWED Rear If transmission is operable: • Transmission in NEUTRAL • 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed • 30 miles (48 km) max distance NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if used, same limitations as above) NOT RECOMMENDED ALL BEST METHOD Front 6 NOT ALLOWED NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used: • Ignition in ON/RUN position • Transmission in NEUTRAL (NOT in Park) BEST METHOD 474 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position. If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to ⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for towing. CAUTION! • DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur. • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. • The manufacturer does not recommend towing this vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 475 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, AWD models can also be towed with the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the transmission in NEUTRAL (not in PARK!), and the rear wheels OFF the ground with no limitation on speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST be in the ON/RUN position to tow in this manner, AWD vehicles must be towed with ALL FOUR wheels OFF the ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the Key Fob is unavailable. CAUTION! • Towing this vehicle using any other method can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. • Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, this vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under the following conditions: • The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. • The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). • The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km). If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck. 6 476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Without The Key Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only approved method of towing without the Key Fob is with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .479 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .480 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .481 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 ▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .484 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 7 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 ▫ Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 ▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . .509 ▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 ▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 ▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .535 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 ▫ Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps . . .535 䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517 ▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .518 ▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .523 ▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 ▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .535 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 ▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp . . . . . .533 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L 7 1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Air Cleaner Filter 8 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L 1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. 7 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following: an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. not crank or start the engine. EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction start this test over. Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light system is ready for testing. (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently happen: serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was Limited Warranty. recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your DEALER SERVICE vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service may then indicate that the system is now ready. operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal attempting any procedure yourself. vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running. 7 484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you. WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed “Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future. CAUTION! • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center. • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine Engine Oil To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to fully warmed engine is shut off. check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is on these engines. at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines. Checking Oil Level — 3.6L Engine CAUTION! CAUTION! Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. 7 486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Change Engine Oil American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. This symbol means that the oil has Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informabeen certified by the American tion. Petroleum Institute (API). The NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inmanufacturer only recommends tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve API Certified engine oils. months, whichever occurs first. Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487 Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine Engine Oil Viscosity — 5.7L Engine MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Mainengine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com- taining Your Vehicle” for further information. partment” illustration in this section. NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available. Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. 7 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomwhere used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomyour area. mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed. Engine Oil Filter Synthetic Engine Oils The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- at every engine oil change. dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to Engine Oil Filter Selection the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil performance may be impaired by supplemental addifilter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality tives. of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters quality filters should be used to assure most efficient Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, filter and are recommended. Materials Added To Engine Oil indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters maintenance intervals. varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomWARNING! mended. The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine Maintenance-Free Battery backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainfor repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is tenance required. near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. 7 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “JumpStarting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. Battery Location WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 CAUTION! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. WARNING! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. 7 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If Equipped Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf — If Equipped HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 A/C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood, behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. 1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips. 7 Access Door 2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover. 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Filter Access Cover 3. Remove the used filter. A/C Air Filter 5. Close the filter access cover. 4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the maintenance intervals. vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this). MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495 Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perforThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. 7 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water. WARNING! Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. Exhaust System When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust blades clean. This will help blade performance. system. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; information can be found on most washer fluid containers. have an authorized technician inspect the complete exThe fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damfluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams the Driver Information Display (DID). or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING! • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. CAUTION! • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. 7 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age: portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in damage. motion. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the systems can result in civil penalties being assessed vehicle. against you. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499 Coolant Checks Cooling System WARNING! • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position. • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) only according to Chrysler Service Manual procedure or by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. 7 500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer. If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032). Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Selection Of Coolant Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. CAUTION! • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501 CAUTION! (Continued) coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): • We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032. 7 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant NOTE: that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concenproperly. Failure to fill these systems properly could trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is −34° F (−37° C) are anticipated. needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer. • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water mended and can result in cooling system damage. If will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, engine cooling system. have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainOAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible. tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503 Cooling System Pressure Cap WARNING! (Continued) The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank. • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal WARNING! rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding spills immediately. or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. (Continued) 7 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle. Points To Remember NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze If an examination of your engine compartment shows no point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. a month. • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032 bottle must also be protected against freezing. should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505 • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are Brake System required, the cooling system should be pressure tested In order to assure brake system performance, all brake for leaks. system components should be inspected periodically. • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to maintenance intervals. MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum WARNING! components. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or hoses are not kinked or obstructed. riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency. condenser clean. • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. 7 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MainCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if taining Your Vehicle” for further information. the brake system warning light indicates system failure. Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services. Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the “FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system. Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. WARNING! • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. (Continued) Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture. 7 508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Transmission Special Additives Selection Of Lubricant The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals. CAUTION! CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509 Fluid Level Check Fluid And Filter Changes The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the disassembled for any reason. transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmisThe all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and sion damage. front differential. The exterior surface of these components should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. CAUTION! Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho- The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in the rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam- middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer case age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The fluid level tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. should be even with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug to add fluid as required. 7 510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole. Fluid Changes Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Change Axle Fluid Rear Axle For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511 Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion What Causes Corrosion? Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. The most common causes are: • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. • Stone and gravel impact. • Insects, tree sap and tar. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Washing The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild resistance built into your vehicle. car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. 7 512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive and Tar Remover to remove. near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is CAUTION! considered the responsibility of the owner. • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513 • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permapackaged and sealed. nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY mud or stone shields behind each wheel. MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to this finish. match the color of your vehicle. Wheel And Wheel Trim Care • All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner. CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. 7 514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If Equipped Interior Care Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting. ner: Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for with a clean, dry towel. leather upholstery. • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular • For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth • For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather protectants on Stain Repel products. upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515 WARNING! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. CAUTION! Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial householdtype glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped Cleaning Headlights with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break- that may scratch the elements. age than glass headlights. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. directly on the mirror. 7 516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly. molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care WARNING! must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do rag. not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt 2. Dry with a soft cloth. assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webSeat Belt Maintenance bing, etc.). Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a mild with the cupholder in the center console. soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed. from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517 FUSES WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer. 7 (Continued) 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment. This module contains fuses and relays. Front Power Distribution Center CAUTION! • When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure. • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519 Cavity 1 2 3 Cartridge Fuse – 40 Amp Green 50 Amp Red Mini-Fuse – – – 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink – 20 Amp Blue – – – – – – – 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 11 12 13 – – – 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red – Description Fuse – Spare Radiator Fan #1 – If Equipped Power Steering #1 / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) – If Equipped Starter Electronic Stability Control Electronic Stability Control Fuse – Spare Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2 All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped Security – If Equipped / Under hood Lamp – Police Horns Air Conditioning Clutch Fuse – Spare 7 520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 14 15 16 18 19 Cartridge Fuse – – – 40 Amp Green 50 Amp Red Mini-Fuse – 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow – – 20 21 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink – – 22 40 Amp Green / 20 Amp Blue – Police – 23 24 28 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue – – – – Description Fuse – Spare Left HID – If Equipped Right HID – If Equipped Radiator Fan #2 – If Equipped Power Steering #2 / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) Wiper Motor Headlamp Washers – If Equipped / Police Feed Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Bat Feed # 3 – If Equipped Police Bat Feed # 1 – If Equipped Police Bat Feed # 3 – If Equipped Fuse – Spare MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521 Cavity 29 Cartridge Fuse – Mini-Fuse 15 Amp Blue 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 – – – – – – – – – 25 Amp Clear – – 25 Amp Clear 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 38 39 – – 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red Description Transmission Control Module (LA/LD Police) Fuse – Spare Engine Module Fuse – Spare Fuse – Spare Powertrain #1 Powertrain #2 Anti-Lock Brake Module Engine Controller/Rad Fan Relays – If Equipped Airbag Module Power Steering Module/AC Clutch Relay 7 522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 48 Cartridge Fuse – Mini-Fuse 10 Amp Red 49 50 51 52 53 – – – – – – – 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red – Description AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect (LX) / Adaptive Cruise (LA) – If Equipped Fuse – Spare Fuse – Spare Vacuum Pump Adaptive Cruise (LD/LX) – If Equipped Fuse – Spare MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523 Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center contains fuses and relays. 7 Rear Power Distribution Center CAUTION! Opening The Access Cover • When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow (Continued) 524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure. • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Cavity 2 3 4 5 6 Cartridge Fuse 60 Amp Yellow — 60 Amp Yellow 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green Mini-Fuse — — — — — Description Front PDC Feed #1 Fuse – Spare Front PDC Feed #2 Sunroof / Dome Lamp – Police Exterior Lighting #1 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525 Cavity 7 8 9 10 11 12 Cartridge Fuse 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink — Mini-Fuse — — — — — 20 Amp Yellow 15 16 17 18 19 20 40 Amp Green 20 Amp Blue — 30 Amp Pink — — — — — — — — Description Exterior Lighting #2 Interior Lighting Power Locks Driver Door Control Module Passenger Door Control Module Dual USB Center Console Rear/Cigar Lighter IP – If Equipped HVAC Blower Left Spot Lamp – Police Fuse – Spare Mod Network Interface – Police Fuse — Spare Fuse — Spare 7 526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 21 22 Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink (6.2L Supercharged) 25 Amp Clear (LD STD) — 23 24 25 26 — — — — 27 31 32 — — — Mini-Fuse — 20 Amp Yellow – Police 10 Amp Red – LA 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue – LD/LX 25 Amp Clear – LA 30 Amp Green – LA 6.2L Supercharged 25 Amp Clear 25 Amp Breaker 15 Amp Blue Description Fuel Pump (6.2L Supercharged) Fuel Pump (LD STD) Right Spot Lamp – Police Integrated Center Stack – LA Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port Integrated Center Stack – LD/LX Tire Pressure Monitor Transmission / Electronic Shift Module (LD/LX) Fuel Pump (LA) Fuel Pump (LA 6.2L Supercharged) Amplifier – If Equipped Power Seats HVAC Module/Cluster MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527 Cavity 33 Cartridge Fuse — Mini-Fuse 15 Amp Blue 34 — 10 Amp Red 35 36 37 38 — — — — 5 Amp Tan 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 15 Amp Blue – LD/LX 20 Amp Yellow – LA 40 41 42 43 — — 30 Amp Pink — — — — 20 Amp Yellow Description Ignition Switch/RF hub Module/ Steering Column Lock-LX If Equipped Steering Column Module/Clock/ Spare – Police Battery Sensor Electronic Exhaust Valve – If Equipped Radio Console Power Outlet/Console Media Hub (LD/LX) Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest (LA) Fuse — Spare Fuse — Spare Rear Defrost Rear Heated Seats/Steering Wheel Module 7 528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 44 Cartridge Fuse — Mini-Fuse 10 Amp Red 45 — 15 Amp Blue 46 47 — — — 10 Amp Red 48 49 50 51 52 — — — — — 20 Amp Yellow — — 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red Description Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear View Camera Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Compass (LDLX)/Humidity Sensor Fuse — Spare Adaptive Front Lighting / Auto High BEAM / Day Time Running Lamps- If Equipped Active Suspension – SRT Fuse — Spare Fuse — Spare Front Heated Seats – If Equipped Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated Seat Switches – If Equipped MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529 Cavity 53 Cartridge Fuse — Mini-Fuse 10 Amp Red 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 10 Amp Red — — — 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 5 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow — — 25 Amp Breaker 10 Amp Red — Description HVAC Module/In Car Temperature Sensor Airbag Module (LA) Fuse — Spare Fuse — Spare Fuse — Spare Airbag Module (LD/LX) Adjustable Pedals – Police Heated Washer Nozzles (LD) Cigar Lighter (LA) – If Equipped Fuse — Spare Fuse — Spare Rear Windows (LD/LX) Airbag Module Fuse — Spare 7 530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 67 68 Cartridge Fuse — — Mini-Fuse 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 69 70 — — — — VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your battery. • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Description Rain and Light Sensor/Sunroof Dual USB Power Outlet – R/A Sense (LD/LX) Rear Sunshade (LD/LX) Fuse — Spare Fuse — Spare in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. REPLACEMENT BULBS • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes and should not be used for replacement. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531 Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578 Visor Vanity Lamps A6220 Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped 194 Door Courtesy 562 Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions. 7 532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Exterior Bulbs Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp) Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp) Front Turn Signal Lamp Front Park Lamp Daytime Running Lamp Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped Front Sidemarker Lamp Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp Rear Sidemarker Lamp Backup Lamp Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) License Rear Fog Lamp – If Equipped Bulb Number HIR2LL D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) PSY24WSV LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533 BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process. WARNING! A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service. Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the ignition turned to the OFF position. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If Equipped 7 534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Standard Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp 1. Open the hood. NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle. 2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the headlamp (outboard) bulb cap. 7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp housing and rotate it clockwise to lock it. CAUTION! Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. 3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to Front Turn Signal Lamps unlock it. 1. Open the hood. 4. Twist the headlamp bulb assembly counterclockwise, NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly. necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp 5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring assembly and assembly on the driver side of the vehicle. install the replacement bulb. 2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the turn 6. Reinstall the bulb and wiring assembly into the headsignal (inboard) bulb cap. lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535 3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp unlock it. The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable 4. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer. pull straight out from the lamp assembly. 5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring connector and Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps install the replacement bulb. The Rear Backup and Turn Signal Lamp use LED sources 6. Install the bulb and connector assembly straight into that are not serviceable separately. The Rear Lamps must be replaced as an assembly, please see your authorized dealer. the lamp until it locks in place. 7. Install the turn signal bulb cap in the headlamp License Lamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock in place. The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be reFront Fog Lamp placed as an assembly, see your authorized dealer. The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are not serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp must be Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer. The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not serviceable separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer 7 536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUID CAPACITIES U.S. Fuel (Approximate) All Engines 18.5 Gallons Engine Oil With Filter 3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts Cooling System * 3.6 Liter Engine – We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/ 10 Quarts Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent. 5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System – We rec14.5 Quarts ommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile Formula. 5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System – We recom15 Quarts mend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile Formula. * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Metric 69.9 Liters 5.6 Liters 6.6 Liters 9.5 Liters 13.9 Liters 14.3 Liters MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology). We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent. We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs. 7 538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Component Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part 87 Octane. 87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended. CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539 Chassis Component Automatic Transmission – 8-Speed Transmission Brake Master Cylinder Front Axle Rear Axle Transfer Case Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5). We recommend you use MOPAR® OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5). We recommend you use MOPAR® Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40. 7 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS 䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 ▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544 8 542 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES The “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change oil change is necessary. indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator scheduled maintenance. message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by indicator message will illuminate. This means that serreferring to the steps described under “Driver Informavice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions tion Dispay (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or Panel” for further information. cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interquired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as whichever comes first. early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your Severe Duty All Models vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 543 Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: • Check engine oil level • Check windshield washer fluid level • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service. • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and power steering (If Equipped) and fill as needed. • Check function of all interior and exterior lights Required Maintenance Intervals. Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: • Change oil and filter • Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake • Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses • Inspect exhaust system • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions 8 544 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints. Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace if necessary. Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes. Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 Maintenance Chart X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter. Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. Replace spark plugs (3.6L engine).** Replace spark plugs (5.7L engine).** Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the transfer case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only). 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 545 X X X X X X X X X X X X 8 X X X X X X 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 546 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing. Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply. X X X X MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 547 WARNING! • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS 䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .551 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .555 ▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .552 ▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .552 ▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .556 9 550 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 ▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 ▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 551 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE current problem. The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services. specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the 9 552 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) correctly and in a timely manner. • Vehicle delivery date and mileage This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004 • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. Phone: (800) 247–9753 They want to know if you need assistance. • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621 center. Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French ter should include the following information: • Owner’s name and address • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 553 Mexico, D. F. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Service Contract Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French). In Mexico Contact Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. 9 554 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns. WARNING! Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 555 To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153), or write to: Administraavailable from an authorized dealer. They are recom- or go to http://www.safercar.gov; tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Buildmended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle ing, Washington, D.C. 20590. operating at its best. You can also obtain other information about motor REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. In Canada MOPAR® PARTS If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact TransIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy roadsafety/ campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer. 9 556 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests manuals (no P.O. Boxes). and a complete list of all tools and equipment. Service Manuals Owner’s Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the mation that students and professional technicians need in assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 557 Call toll free at: Treadwear • 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. • 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: • www.techauthority.com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Traction Grades The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. 9 558 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE WARNING! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. INDEX 10 560 INDEX About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .175 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Air Bag Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Air bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Air bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .489 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Alarm Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 INDEX 561 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Appearance Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .310 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .24 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 10 562 INDEX Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .267 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Child Restraints Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Caps, Filler Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Brake Control System, Electronic Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 .539 .369 .372 .372 .373 .506 .506 .369 .267 .353 .158 .530 .101 INDEX 563 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .89 Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .88 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .83 Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .79 Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Connector UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 .307 .254 .553 .503 .499 .501 .536 .499 .503 .500 .504 .504 .503 .503 .500 .511 .175 10 564 INDEX Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 Disposal Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Door Locks Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .33 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Driver Information Display Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Driver Information Display (DID) Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Driver Information Display (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Driving Dipsticks Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 INDEX 565 E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .482 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .518 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .170 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Emergency, In Case of Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 10 566 INDEX Engine Oil . . . . . . . . Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Engine Oil Disposal . Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Flashers Hazard Warning . . . . Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Turn Signal . . . . . . . Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range . . . . . Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Fuel Requirements . . Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Maintenance . . . . . . . Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Replacement Parts . . . Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Starting . . . . . . . . . . Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Flooded Engine Starting Floor Console . . . . . . . . Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . Fluid Capacities . . . . . . Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 .430 .428 .431 .431 .430 .349 .254 .539 .536 .101 .510 INDEX 567 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 .506 .499 .485 .509 .537 .153 .141 .203 .468 .423 .426 .424 .424 .267 .423 .267 .426 .424 Octane Rating . Requirements . Specifications . Tank Capacity . Fuel, Flexible . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 .423 .537 .536 .428 .517 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . Gauges Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Information . . . . . . . . . . . Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 .424 .423 .424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 .267 .267 .267 .355 .422 .515 10 568 INDEX Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Hazard Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .155 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Hitches Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .155 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 INDEX 569 Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 iPod®/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 10 570 INDEX LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .383 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .267 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .159 INDEX 571 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .267 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .267 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 .484 .542 .267 .556 .506 .143 .143 .143 .424 .110 .118 .118 10 572 INDEX Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 MOPAR® Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 INDEX 573 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .392 Power Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .247 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .21 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 .503 .310 .308 .307 .163 .510 .228 .253 .213 .141 .260 10 574 INDEX Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Remote Control Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18 Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .308 Remote Starting Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . .302 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 INDEX 575 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Rotation, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .54 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .57 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 10 576 INDEX Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 SENTRY KEY® FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .267 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 Specifications Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 INDEX 577 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .308 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .60 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire and Loading Information Placard . . Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 .164 .311 .267 .164 .150 .391 .384 .101 .406 .396 .409 .455 .403 .396 .399 10 578 INDEX Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 .455 .406 .391 .412 .267 .557 .400 .407 .411 .384 .386 .401 .456 .405 .445 .406 .384 .442 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 .437 .473 .441 .450 .441 .450 .365 .375 .437 .449 .440 .443 .448 .442 .447 .441 .441 .509 INDEX 579 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .24 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .21 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .21 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .302 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Uconnect® Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .307 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 10 580 INDEX Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .267 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 Washer Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems. Chrysler Group LLC 15UF-126-AA 15C481-126-AB First Edition Second Edition Printedinin U.S.A. U.S.A. Printed